Splunk Core Certified Power User SPLK-1002 Exam Practice Test

Page: 1 / 14
Total 297 questions
Question 1

A user runs the following search:

index---X sourcetype=Y I chart count (domain) as count, sum (price) as sum by product, action usenull=f useother---f

Which of the following table headers match the order this command creates?



Question 2
Question 3

Which of the following knowledge objects can reference field aliases?



Answer : A

Field aliases in Splunk are alternate names assigned to fields. These can be particularly useful for normalizing data from different sources or simply for making field names more intuitive. Once an alias is created for a field, it can be used across various Splunk knowledge objects, enhancing their flexibility and utility.

A . Calculated fields, lookups, event types, and tags: This is the correct answer. Field aliases can indeed be referenced in calculated fields, lookups, event types, and tags within Splunk. When you create an alias for a field, that alias can then be used in these knowledge objects just like any standard field name.

Calculated fields: These are expressions that can create new field values based on existing data. You can use an alias in a calculated field expression to refer to the original field.

Lookups: These are used to enrich your event data by referencing external data sources. If you've created an alias for a field that matches a field in your lookup table, you can use that alias in your lookup configurations.

Event types: These are classifications for events that meet certain search criteria. You can use field aliases in the search criteria for defining an event type.

Tags: These allow you to assign meaningful labels to data, making it easier to search and report on. You can use field aliases in the search criteria that you tag.


Question 4

Which search would limit an "alert" tag to the "host" field?



Answer : D

The search below would limit an ''alert'' tag to the ''host'' field.

tag::host=alert

The search does the following:

It uses tag syntax to filter events by tags. Tags are custom labels that can be applied to fields or field values to provide additional context or meaning for your data.

It specifies tag::host=alert as the tag filter. This means that it will only return events that have an ''alert'' tag applied to their host field or host field value.

It uses an equal sign (=) to indicate an exact match between the tag and the field or field value.


Question 5
Question 6

What is the correct syntax to find events associated with a tag?



Answer : D

The correct syntax to find events associated with a tag in Splunk is tag=<value>1. So, the correct answer is D) tag=<value>. This syntax allows you to annotate specified fields in your search results with tags1.

In Splunk, tags are a type of knowledge object that you can use to add meaningful aliases to field values in your data1. For example, if you have a field called status_code in your data, you might have different status codes like 200, 404, 500, etc. You can create tags for these status codes like success for 200, not_found for 404, and server_error for 500. Then, you can use the tag command in your searches to find events associated with these tags1.

Here is an example of how you can use the tag command in a search:

index=main sourcetype=access_combined | tag status_code

In this search, the tag command annotates the status_code field in the search results with the corresponding tags. If you have tagged the status code 200 with success, the status code 404 with not_found, and the status code 500 with server_error, the search results will include these tags1.

You can also use the tag command with a specific tag value to find events associated with that tag. For example, the following search finds all events where the status code is tagged with success:

index=main sourcetype=access_combined | tag status_code | search tag::status_code=success

In this search, the tag command annotates the status_code field with the corresponding tags, and the search command filters the results to include only events where the status_code field is tagged with success1.


Question 7

How can an existing accelerated data model be edited?



Answer : C

An existing accelerated data model can be edited, but the data model must be de-accelerated before any structural edits can be made (Option C). This is because the acceleration process involves pre-computing and storing data, and changes to the data model's structure could invalidate or conflict with the pre-computed data. Once the data model is de-accelerated and edits are completed, it can be re-accelerated to optimize performance.


Question 8

In the following eval statement, what is the value of description if the status is 503? index=main | eval description=case(status==200, "OK", status==404, "Not found", status==500, "Internal Server Error")



Question 9

Which of the following statements about calculated fields in Splunk is true?



Answer : B

The correct answer is B. Calculated fields can be chained together to create more complex fields.

Calculated fields are fields that are added to events at search time by using eval expressions. They can be used to perform calculations with the values of two or more fields already present in those events. Calculated fields can be defined with Splunk Web or in the props.conf file. They can be used in searches, reports, dashboards, and data models like any other extracted field1.

Calculated fields can also be chained together to create more complex fields. This means that you can use a calculated field as an input for another calculated field. For example, if you have a calculated field named total that sums up the values of two fields named price and tax, you can use the total field to create another calculated field named discount that applies a percentage discount to the total field. To do this, you need to define the discount field with an eval expression that references the total field, such as:

discount = total * 0.9

This will create a new field named discount that is equal to 90% of the total field value for each event2.


About calculated fields

Chaining calculated fields

Question 10
Question 11

Use the dedup command to _____.



Answer : B


Question 12

Which workflow uses field values to perform a secondary search?



Question 13
Question 14

To create a tag, which of the following conditions must be met by the user?



Question 15

When a search returns __________, you can view the results as a list.



Answer : C


Question 16
Question 17

These users can create global knowledge objects. (Select all that apply.)



Answer : B, C


Question 18

What is the correct syntax to find events associated with a tag?



Answer : D

The correct syntax to find events associated with a tag in Splunk is tag=<value>1. So, the correct answer is D) tag=<value>. This syntax allows you to annotate specified fields in your search results with tags1.

In Splunk, tags are a type of knowledge object that you can use to add meaningful aliases to field values in your data1. For example, if you have a field called status_code in your data, you might have different status codes like 200, 404, 500, etc. You can create tags for these status codes like success for 200, not_found for 404, and server_error for 500. Then, you can use the tag command in your searches to find events associated with these tags1.

Here is an example of how you can use the tag command in a search:

index=main sourcetype=access_combined | tag status_code

In this search, the tag command annotates the status_code field in the search results with the corresponding tags. If you have tagged the status code 200 with success, the status code 404 with not_found, and the status code 500 with server_error, the search results will include these tags1.

You can also use the tag command with a specific tag value to find events associated with that tag. For example, the following search finds all events where the status code is tagged with success:

index=main sourcetype=access_combined | tag status_code | search tag::status_code=success

In this search, the tag command annotates the status_code field with the corresponding tags, and the search command filters the results to include only events where the status_code field is tagged with success1.


Question 19

Which method in the Field Extractor would extract the port number from the following event? |

10/20/2022 - 125.24.20.1 ++++ port 54 - user: admin



Answer : B

The rex command allows you to extract fields from events using regular expressions. You can use the rex command to specify a named group that matches the port number in the event. For example:

rex '\+\+\+\+port (?\d+)'

This will create a field called port with the value 54 for the event.

The delimiter method is not suitable for this event because there is no consistent delimiter between the fields. The regular expression method is not a valid option for the Field Extractor tool. The Field Extractor tool can extract regular expressions, but it is not a method by itself.


Question 20

What will you learn from the results of the following search?

sourcetype=cisco_esa | transaction mid, dcid, icid | timechart avg(duration)



Answer : A


Question 21

Which of the following statements are true for this search? (Select all that apply.) SEARCH: sourcetype=access* |fields action productld status



Answer : C


Question 22
Question 23
Question 24
Question 25

Which field will be used to populate the field if the productName and product:d fields have values for a given event?



Answer : B

The correct answer is B. The value for the productName field because it appears first.

The coalesce function is an eval function that takes an arbitrary number of arguments and returns the first value that is not null. A null value means that the field has no value at all, while an empty value means that the field has a value, but it is '''' or zero-length1.

The coalesce function can be used to combine fields that have different names but represent the same data, such as IP address or user name. The coalesce function can also be used to rename fields for clarity or convenience2.

The syntax for the coalesce function is:

coalesce(<field1>,<field2>,...)

The coalesce function will return the value of the first field that is not null in the argument list. If all fields are null, the coalesce function will return null.

For example, if you have a set of events where the IP address is extracted to either clientip or ipaddress, you can use the coalesce function to define a new field called ip, that takes the value of either clientip or ipaddress, depending on which is not null:

| eval ip=coalesce(clientip,ipaddress)

In your example, you have a set of events where the product name is extracted to either productName or productid, and you use the coalesce function to define a new field called productINFO, that takes the value of either productName or productid, depending on which is not null:

| eval productINFO=coalesce(productName,productid)

If both productName and productid fields have values for a given event, the coalesce function will return the value of the productName field because it appears first in the argument list. The productid field will be ignored by the coalesce function.

Therefore, the value for the productName field will be used to populate the productINFO field if both fields have values for a given event.


Search Command> Coalesce

USAGE OF SPLUNK EVAL FUNCTION : COALESCE

Question 26

What fields does the transaction command add to the raw events? (select all that apply)



Question 27

Which of the following statements is true about the root dataset of a data model?



Answer : B

In Splunk, a data model's root dataset is the foundational element upon which the rest of the data model is built. The root dataset can be of various types, including search, transaction, or event-based datasets. One of the key features of the root dataset is that it automatically inherits the knowledge objects associated with its base search. These knowledge objects include field extractions, lookups, aliases, and calculated fields that are defined for the base search, ensuring that the root dataset has all necessary contextual information from the outset. This allows users to build upon this dataset with additional child datasets and objects without having to redefine the base search's knowledge objects.


Question 28

When performing a regular expression (regex) field extraction using the Field Extractor (FX), what happens when the require option is used?



Question 29

which of the following commands are used when creating visualizations(select all that apply.)



Answer : A, C, D

The following commands are used when creating visualizations: geom, geostats, and iplocation. Visualizations are graphical representations of data that show trends, patterns, or comparisons. Visualizations can have different types, such as charts, tables, maps, etc. Visualizations can be created by using various commands that transform the data into a suitable format for the visualization type. Some of the commands that are used when creating visualizations are:

geom: This command is used to create choropleth maps that show geographic regions with different colors based on some metric. The geom command takes a KMZ file as an argument that defines the geographic regions and their boundaries. The geom command also takes a field name as an argument that specifies the metric to use for coloring the regions.

geostats: This command is used to create cluster maps that show groups of events with different sizes and colors based on some metric. The geostats command takes a latitude and longitude field as arguments that specify the location of the events. The geostats command also takes a statistical function as an argument that specifies the metric to use for sizing and coloring the clusters.

iplocation: This command is used to create location-based visualizations that show events with different attributes based on their IP addresses. The iplocation command takes an IP address field as an argument and adds some additional fields to the events, such as Country, City, Latitude, Longitude, etc. The iplocation command can be used with other commands such as geom or geostats to create maps based on IP addresses.


Question 30

When does the CIM add-on apply preconfigured data models to the data?



Answer : A

The Common Information Model (CIM) add-on in Splunk applies preconfigured data models to data at search time. This means that when a search is executed, the CIM add-on uses its predefined data models to normalize and map the relevant data to a common format. This approach ensures that data is interpreted and analyzed consistently across various datasets without modifying the data at index time.


Splunk Docs: About the Common Information Model

Splunk Answers: CIM Add-on Data Models

Question 31

When using | timechart by host, which field is represented in the x-axis?



Answer : D


Question 32

Data models are composed of one or more of which of the following datasets? (select all that apply)



Answer : A, B, C

Data model datasets have a hierarchical relationship with each other, meaning they have parent-child relationships. Data models can contain multiple dataset hierarchies. There are three types of dataset hierarchies: event, search, and transaction.

https://docs.splunk.com/Splexicon:Datamodeldataset


Question 33

Two separate results tables are being combined using the join command. The outer table has the following values:

The inner table has the following values:

The line of SPL used to join the tables is: join employeeNumber type=outer

How many rows are returned in the new table?



Answer : C

In this case, the outer join is applied, which means that all rows from the outer (left) table will be included, even if there are no matching rows in the inner (right) table. The result will include all five rows from the outer table, with the matched data from the inner table where employeeNumber matches. Rows without matching employeeNumber values will have null values for the fields from the inner table.


Splunk Documentation - Join Command

Question 34

What is a limitation of searches generated by workflow actions?



Answer : D


Question 35

Consider the following search:

index=web sourcetype=access_corabined

The log shows several events that share the same jsesszonid value (SD462K101O2F267). View the events as a group.

From the following list, which search groups events by jSSESSIONID?



Question 36
Question 37
Question 38

Which search would limit an "alert" tag to the "host" field?



Answer : D

The search below would limit an ''alert'' tag to the ''host'' field.

tag::host=alert

The search does the following:

It uses tag syntax to filter events by tags. Tags are custom labels that can be applied to fields or field values to provide additional context or meaning for your data.

It specifies tag::host=alert as the tag filter. This means that it will only return events that have an ''alert'' tag applied to their host field or host field value.

It uses an equal sign (=) to indicate an exact match between the tag and the field or field value.


Question 39

How many ways are there to access the Field Extractor Utility?



Answer : A


Question 40
Question 41
Question 42

When creating an event type, which is allowed in the search string?



Answer : C

When creating an event type in Splunk, subsearches are allowed in the search string. Subsearches enable users to perform a secondary search whose results are used as input for the main search. This functionality is useful for more complex event type definitions that require additional filtering or criteria based on another search.


Splunk Docs: About subsearches

Splunk Docs: Event type creation

Splunk Answers: Using subsearches in event types

Question 43

The eval command 'if' function requires the following three arguments (in order):



Answer : A

The eval command 'if' function requires the following three arguments (in order): boolean expression, result if true, result if false. The eval command is a search command that allows you to create new fields or modify existing fields by performing calculations or transformations on them. The eval command can use various functions to perform different operations on fields. The 'if' function is one of the functions that can be used with the eval command to perform conditional evaluations on fields. The 'if' function takes three arguments: a boolean expression that evaluates to true or false, a result that will be returned if the boolean expression is true, and a result that will be returned if the boolean expression is false. The 'if' function returns one of the two results based on the evaluation of the boolean expression.


Question 44

The macro weekly sales (2) contains the search string:

index=games | eval ProductSales = $Price$ * $AmountSold$

Which of the following will return results?



Answer : C

To use a search macro in a search string, you need to place a back tick character (`) before and after the macro name1. You also need to use the same number of arguments as defined in the macro2. The macro weekly sales (2) has two arguments: Price and AmountSold. Therefore, you need to provide two values for these arguments when you call the macro.

The option A is incorrect because it uses parentheses instead of back ticks around the macro name. The option B is incorrect because it uses underscores instead of spaces in the macro name. The option D is incorrect because it uses spaces instead of commas to separate the argument values.


Question 45
Question 46
Question 47
Question 48

This is what Splunk uses to categorize the data that is being indexed.



Answer : B


Question 49

A POST workflow action will pass which types of arguments to an external website?



Answer : B

A POST workflow action in Splunk is designed to send data to an external web service by using HTTP POST requests. This type of workflow action can pass a combination of clear text strings and variables derived from the search results or event data. The clear text strings might include static text or predefined values, while the variables are dynamic elements that represent specific fields or values extracted from the Splunk events. This flexibility allows for constructing detailed and context-specific requests to external systems, enabling various integration and automation scenarios. The POST request can include both types of data, making it versatile for different use cases.


Question 50
Question 51

A user wants to convert numeric field values to strings and also to sort on those values.

Which command should be used first, the eval or the sort?



Question 52

In most large Splunk environments, what is the most efficient command that can be used to group events by fields/



Answer : B

https://docs.splunk.com/Documentation/Splunk/8.0.2/Search/Abouttransactions

In other cases, it's usually better to use thestatscommand, which performs more efficiently, especially in a distributed environment. Often there is a unique ID in the events andstatscan be used.


Question 53

If there are fields in the data with values that are " " or empty but not null, which of the following would add a value?



Answer : D

The correct answer is D. | eval notNULL = '''' fillnull value=0 notNULL

Option A is incorrect because it is missing a comma between the ''0'' and the notNULL in the if function. The correct syntax for the if function is if (condition, true_value, false_value).

Option B is incorrect because it is missing the false_value argument in the if function. The correct syntax for the if function is if (condition, true_value, false_value).

Option C is incorrect because it uses the nullfill command, which only replaces null values, not empty strings. The nullfill command is equivalent to fillnull value=null.

Option D is correct because it uses the eval command to assign an empty string to the notNULL field, and then uses the fillnull command to replace the empty string with a zero. The fillnull command can replace any value with a specified replacement, not just null values.


Question 54

What is the correct syntax to find events associated with a tag?



Answer : D

The correct syntax to find events associated with a tag in Splunk is tag=<value>1. So, the correct answer is D) tag=<value>. This syntax allows you to annotate specified fields in your search results with tags1.

In Splunk, tags are a type of knowledge object that you can use to add meaningful aliases to field values in your data1. For example, if you have a field called status_code in your data, you might have different status codes like 200, 404, 500, etc. You can create tags for these status codes like success for 200, not_found for 404, and server_error for 500. Then, you can use the tag command in your searches to find events associated with these tags1.

Here is an example of how you can use the tag command in a search:

index=main sourcetype=access_combined | tag status_code

In this search, the tag command annotates the status_code field in the search results with the corresponding tags. If you have tagged the status code 200 with success, the status code 404 with not_found, and the status code 500 with server_error, the search results will include these tags1.

You can also use the tag command with a specific tag value to find events associated with that tag. For example, the following search finds all events where the status code is tagged with success:

index=main sourcetype=access_combined | tag status_code | search tag::status_code=success

In this search, the tag command annotates the status_code field with the corresponding tags, and the search command filters the results to include only events where the status_code field is tagged with success1.


Question 55

Data models are composed of one or more of which of the following datasets? (select all that apply)



Answer : A, B, C

Data model datasets have a hierarchical relationship with each other, meaning they have parent-child relationships. Data models can contain multiple dataset hierarchies. There are three types of dataset hierarchies: event, search, and transaction.

https://docs.splunk.com/Splexicon:Datamodeldataset


Question 56
Question 57

This function of the stats command allows you to identify the number of values a field has.



Answer : D


Question 58

How many ways are there to access the Field Extractor Utility?



Answer : A


Question 59
Question 60
Question 61

When should you use the transaction command instead of the scats command?



Answer : D

The transaction command is used to group events into transactions based on some common characteristics, such as fields, time, or both. The transaction command can also specify start and end constraints for the transactions, such as a field value that indicates the beginning or the end of a transaction. The stats command is used to calculate summary statistics on the events, such as count, sum, average, etc. The stats command cannot group events based on start and end constraints, but only on fields or time buckets. Therefore, the transaction command should be used instead of the stats command when you need to group events based on start and end constraints.


Question 62

A field alias has been created based on an original field. A search without any transforming commands is then executed in Smart Mode. Which field name appears in the results?



Question 63

Field aliases are used to __________ data



Answer : D


Question 64

Which of the following searches will return all clientip addresses that start with 108?



Answer : A


Question 65
Question 66

When creating an event type, which is allowed in the search string?



Answer : C

When creating an event type in Splunk, subsearches are allowed in the search string. Subsearches enable users to perform a secondary search whose results are used as input for the main search. This functionality is useful for more complex event type definitions that require additional filtering or criteria based on another search.


Splunk Docs: About subsearches

Splunk Docs: Event type creation

Splunk Answers: Using subsearches in event types

Question 67

Consider the following search:

Index=web sourcetype=access_combined

The log shows several events that share the same JSESSIONID value (SD404K289O2F151). View the events as a group. From the following list, which search groups events by JSESSIONID?



Answer : B


Question 68
Question 69
Question 70

Which of the following can a field alias be applied to?



Answer : C

Field aliases in Splunk are used to map field names in event data to alternate names to make them easier to understand or consistent across datasets.

Option A (Tags): Field aliases are not directly applied to tags. Tags are used for categorizing events or field values.

Option B (Indexes): Field aliases cannot be applied to indexes. Indexes are physical storage locations for events in Splunk.

Option C (Sourcetypes): This is correct. Field aliases can be defined at the sourcetype level to ensure consistent naming across events of the same sourcetype.

Option D (Event types): Event types are saved searches, and field aliases do not apply here directly.


Splunk Docs: Field Aliases

Question 71

A POST workflow action will pass which types of arguments to an external website?



Answer : B

A POST workflow action in Splunk is designed to send data to an external web service by using HTTP POST requests. This type of workflow action can pass a combination of clear text strings and variables derived from the search results or event data. The clear text strings might include static text or predefined values, while the variables are dynamic elements that represent specific fields or values extracted from the Splunk events. This flexibility allows for constructing detailed and context-specific requests to external systems, enabling various integration and automation scenarios. The POST request can include both types of data, making it versatile for different use cases.


Question 72

A user wants to create a workflow action that will retrieve a specific field value from an event and run a search in a new browser window

in the user's Splunk instance. What kind of workflow action should they create?



Answer : B

A Search workflow action is the appropriate choice when a user wants to retrieve a specific field value from an event and run a search in a new browser window within their Splunk instance (Option B). This type of workflow action allows users to define a search that utilizes field values from selected events as parameters, enabling more detailed investigation or context-specific analysis based on the original search results.


Question 73
Question 74
Question 75

This function of the stats command allows you to return the middle-most value of field X.



Answer : A


Question 76

When does the CIM add-on apply preconfigured data models to the data?



Answer : A

The Common Information Model (CIM) add-on in Splunk applies preconfigured data models to data at search time. This means that when a search is executed, the CIM add-on uses its predefined data models to normalize and map the relevant data to a common format. This approach ensures that data is interpreted and analyzed consistently across various datasets without modifying the data at index time.


Splunk Docs: About the Common Information Model

Splunk Answers: CIM Add-on Data Models

Question 77
Question 78

When using the timechart command, how can a user group the events into buckets based on time?



Answer : A


Question 79

Which of the following knowledge objects can reference field aliases?



Answer : A

Field aliases in Splunk are alternate names assigned to fields. These can be particularly useful for normalizing data from different sources or simply for making field names more intuitive. Once an alias is created for a field, it can be used across various Splunk knowledge objects, enhancing their flexibility and utility.

A . Calculated fields, lookups, event types, and tags: This is the correct answer. Field aliases can indeed be referenced in calculated fields, lookups, event types, and tags within Splunk. When you create an alias for a field, that alias can then be used in these knowledge objects just like any standard field name.

Calculated fields: These are expressions that can create new field values based on existing data. You can use an alias in a calculated field expression to refer to the original field.

Lookups: These are used to enrich your event data by referencing external data sources. If you've created an alias for a field that matches a field in your lookup table, you can use that alias in your lookup configurations.

Event types: These are classifications for events that meet certain search criteria. You can use field aliases in the search criteria for defining an event type.

Tags: These allow you to assign meaningful labels to data, making it easier to search and report on. You can use field aliases in the search criteria that you tag.


Question 80

Which of the following statements describe the search below? (select all that apply)

Index=main I transaction clientip host maxspan=30s maxpause=5s



Answer : A, B, D

The search below groups events by two or more fields (clientip and host), creates transactions with start and end constraints (maxspan=30s and maxpause=5s), and calculates the duration of each transaction.

index=main | transaction clientip host maxspan=30s maxpause=5s

The search does the following:

It filters the events by the index main, which is a default index in Splunk that contains all data that is not sent to other indexes.

It uses the transaction command to group events into transactions based on two fields: clientip and host. The transaction command creates new events from groups of events that share the same clientip and host values.

It specifies the start and end constraints for the transactions using the maxspan and maxpause arguments. The maxspan argument sets the maximum time span between the first and last events in a transaction. The maxpause argument sets the maximum time span between any two consecutive events in a transaction. In this case, the maxspan is 30 seconds and the maxpause is 5 seconds, meaning that any transaction that has a longer time span or pause will be split into multiple transactions.

It creates some additional fields for each transaction, such as duration, eventcount, startime, etc. The duration field shows the time span between the first and last events in a transaction.


Question 81

Which of the following statements describe the Common Information Model (CIM)? (select all that apply)



Question 82

Which of the following is true about a datamodel that has been accelerated?



Answer : A

A data model that has been accelerated can be used with Pivot, the | tstats command, or the | datamodel command (Option A). Acceleration pre-computes and stores results for quicker access, enhancing the performance of searches and analyses that utilize the data model, especially for large datasets. This makes accelerated data models highly efficient for use in various analytical tools and commands within Splunk.


Question 83
Question 84

A user wants a table that will show the total revenue made for each product in each sales region. Which would be the correct SPL query to use?



Answer : B

The chart command with sum(price) by product, region will return a table where the total revenue (price) is aggregated (sum) for each product and sales region. This is the correct way to aggregate data in Splunk.


Splunk Docs - chart command

Question 85
Question 86

When should you use the transaction command instead of the scats command?



Answer : D

The transaction command is used to group events into transactions based on some common characteristics, such as fields, time, or both. The transaction command can also specify start and end constraints for the transactions, such as a field value that indicates the beginning or the end of a transaction. The stats command is used to calculate summary statistics on the events, such as count, sum, average, etc. The stats command cannot group events based on start and end constraints, but only on fields or time buckets. Therefore, the transaction command should be used instead of the stats command when you need to group events based on start and end constraints.


Question 87
Question 88
Question 89
Question 90

Based on the macro definition shown below, what is the correct way to execute the macro in a search string?



Answer : B


The correct way to execute the macro in a search string is to use the formatmacro_name($arg1$, $arg2$, ...)where$arg1$,$arg2$, etc. are the arguments for the macro. In this case, the macro name isconvert_salesand it takes three arguments:currency,symbol, andrate. The arguments are enclosed in dollar signs and separated by commas. Therefore, the correct way to execute the macro isconvert_sales($euro$, $$, .79).

Question 91

Calculated fields can be based on which of the following?



Answer : B

'Calculated fields can reference all types of field extractions and field aliasing, but they cannot reference lookups, event types, or tags.'


Question 92
Question 93
Question 94

The gauge command:



Answer : B


Question 95
Question 96

Which of the following statements are true for this search? (Select all that apply.) SEARCH: sourcetype=access* |fields action productld status



Answer : C


Question 97

Which of the following describes this search?

New Search

'third_party_outages(EMEA,-24h)'



Question 98

Which command can include both an over and a by clause to divide results into sub-groupings?



Answer : A


Question 99

Which of the following expressions could be used to create a calculated field called gigabytes?



Answer : B


Question 100

This clause is used to group the output of a stats command by a specific name.



Answer : B


Question 101

Which of these stats commands will show the total bytes for each unique combination of page and server?



Answer : B

The correct command to show the total bytes for each unique combination of page and server isindex=web | stats sum (bytes) BY page server. In Splunk, thestatscommand is used to calculate aggregate statistics over the dataset, such as count, sum, avg, etc. When using theBYclause, it groups the results by the specified fields. The correct syntax does not include commas or the word 'AND' between the field names. Instead, it simply lists the field names separated by spaces within theBYclause.

Reference: The usage of thestatscommand with theBYclause is confirmed by examples in the Splunk Community, where it's explained thatstatswith aby foo barwill output one row for every unique combination of thebyfields1.


Question 102

What does the fillnull command do in this search?

index=main sourcetype=http_log | fillnull value="Unknown" src



Answer : C

The fillnull command in Splunk is used to replace null (missing) field values with a specified value.

Explanation of options:

A: Incorrect, as fillnull does not set fields to null; it fills null values with a specific value.

B: Incorrect, as the command only affects the specified field (src in this case).

C: Correct, as the fillnull command explicitly sets null values in the src field to 'Unknown'.

D: Incorrect, as only the src field is affected, not all fields.

Example:

If the src field is null for some events, fillnull will populate 'Unknown' in those cases.


Question 103
Question 104

Data model fields can be added using the Auto-Extracted method. Which of the following statements describe Auto-Extracted fields? (select all that apply)



Question 105

Which type of workflow action sends field values to an external resource (e.g. a ticketing system)?



Answer : A

The type of workflow action that sends field values to an external resource (e.g. a ticketing system) is POST. A POST workflow action allows you to send a POST request to a URI location with field values or static values as arguments. For example, you can use a POST workflow action to create a ticket in an external system with information from an event.


Question 106

Which function should you use with the transaction command to set the maximum total time between the earliest and latest events returned?



Answer : D

The maxspan function of the transaction command allows you to set the maximum total time between the earliest and latest events returned. The maxspan function is an argument that can be used with the transaction command to specify the start and end constraints for the transactions. The maxspan function takes a time modifier as its value, such as 30s, 5m, 1h, etc. The maxspan function sets the maximum time span between the first and last events in a transaction. If the time span between the first and last events exceeds the maxspan value, the transaction will be split into multiple transactions.


Question 107

A user runs the following search:

index---X sourcetype=Y I chart count (domain) as count, sum (price) as sum by product, action usenull=f useother---f

Which of the following table headers match the order this command creates?



Question 108
Question 109
Question 110

Where are the descriptions of the data models that come with the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) Add-on documented?



Answer : D

The CIM Add-on manual contains the descriptions of the data models that come with the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) Add-on, as well as how to set up, use, and customize the add-on.

Reference

CIM Add-on manual

Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) | Splunkbase

Understand and use the Common Information Model Add-on - Splunk


Question 111

A user wants to create a workflow action that will retrieve a specific field value from an event and run a search in a new browser window

in the user's Splunk instance. What kind of workflow action should they create?



Answer : B

A Search workflow action is the appropriate choice when a user wants to retrieve a specific field value from an event and run a search in a new browser window within their Splunk instance (Option B). This type of workflow action allows users to define a search that utilizes field values from selected events as parameters, enabling more detailed investigation or context-specific analysis based on the original search results.


Question 112
Question 113
Question 114

How many ways are there to access the Field Extractor Utility?



Answer : A


Question 115

Which of the following describes this search?

New Search

'third_party_outages(EMEA,-24h)'



Question 116
Question 117

Which of the following statements describe the Common Information Model (CIM)? (select all that apply)



Question 118
Question 119

Which one of the following statements about the search command is true?



Question 120

Which of the following is one of the pre-configured data models included in the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) add-on?



Answer : D


Question 121

Which of the following statements describes POST workflow actions?



Answer : D


Question 122

What is needed to define a calculated field?



Answer : A

A calculated field in Splunk is created using an eval expression, which allows users to perform calculations or transformations on field values during search time.


Splunk Docs - Calculated fields

Question 123

Which of the following statements best describes a macro?



Answer : C

The correct answer is C. A macro is a portion of a search that can be reused in multiple places.

A macro is a way to reuse a piece of SPL code in different searches. A macro can be any part of a search, such as an eval statement or a search term, and does not need to be a complete command. A macro can also take arguments, which are variables that can be replaced by different values when the macro is called. A macro can also contain another macro within it, which is called a nested macro1.

To create a macro, you need to define its name, definition, arguments, and description in the Settings > Advanced Search > Search Macros page in Splunk Web or in the macros.conf file. To use a macro in a search, you need to enclose the macro name in backtick characters (`) and provide values for the arguments if any1.

For example, if you have a macro named my_macro that takes one argument named object and has the following definition:

search sourcetype= object

You can use it in a search by writing:

my_macro(web)

This will expand the macro and run the following SPL code:

search sourcetype=web

The benefits of using macros are that they can simplify complex searches, reduce errors, improve readability, and promote consistency1.

The other options are not correct because they describe other types of knowledge objects in Splunk, not macros. These objects are:

A) An event type is a method of categorizing events based on a search. An event type assigns a label to events that match a specific search criteria. Event types can be used to filter and group events, create alerts, or generate reports2.

B) A field alias is a way to associate an additional (new) name with an existing field name. A field alias can be used to normalize fields from different sources that have different names but represent the same data. Field aliases can also be used to rename fields for clarity or convenience3.

D) An alert is a knowledge object that enables you to schedule searches for specific events and trigger actions when certain conditions are met. An alert can be used to monitor your data for anomalies, errors, or other patterns of interest and notify you or others when they occur4.


About event types

About field aliases

About alerts

Define search macros in Settings

Use search macros in searches

Question 124
Question 125
Question 126

Which of the following describes the I transaction command?



Answer : C

Thetransactioncommand is a Splunk command that finds transactions based on events that meet various constraints .

Transactions are made up of the raw text (the _raw field) of each member, the time and date fields of the earliest member, as well as the union of all other fields of each member .

Thetransactioncommand groups events together by matching one or more fields that have the same value across the events . For example,| transaction clientipwill group events that have the same value in theclientipfield.


Question 127

When using a field value variable with a Workflow Action, which punctuation mark will escape the data



Answer : B

When using a field value variable with a Workflow Action, the exclamation mark (!) will escape the data. A Workflow Action is a custom action that performs a task when you click on a field value in your search results. A Workflow Action can be configured with various options, such as label name, base URL, URI parameters, post arguments, app context, etc. A field value variable is a placeholder for the field value that will be used to replace the variable in the URL or post argument of the Workflow Action. A field value variable is written as fieldname, where field_name is the name of the field whose value will be used. However, if the field value contains special characters that need to be escaped, such as spaces, commas, etc., you can use the exclamation mark (!) before and after the field value variable to escape the data. For example, if you have a field value variable host, you can write it as !$host! to escape any special characters in the host field value.

Therefore, option B is the correct answer.


Question 128

Clicking a SEGMENT on a chart, ________.



Answer : C


Question 129

Which of the following searches would create a graph similar to the one below?



Answer : C

The following search would create a graph similar to the one below:

index_internal sourcetype=Savesplunker | fields sourcetype, status | transaction status maxspan=1d | timechart count by status

The search does the following:

It uses index_internal to specify the internal index that contains Splunk logs and metrics.

It uses sourcetype=Savesplunker to filter events by the sourcetype that indicates the Splunk Enterprise Security app.

It uses fields sourcetype, status to keep only the sourcetype and status fields in the events.

It uses transaction status maxspan=1d to group events into transactions based on the status field with a maximum time span of one day between the first and last events in a transaction.

It uses timechart count by status to create a time-based chart that shows the count of transactions for each status value over time.

The graph shows the following:

It is a line graph with two lines, one yellow and one blue.

The x-axis is labeled with dates from Wed, Apr 4, 2018 to Tue, Apr 10, 2018.

The y-axis is labeled with numbers from 0 to 15.

The yellow line represents ''shipped'' and the blue line represents ''success''.

The yellow line has a steady increase from 0 to 15, while the blue line has a sharp increase from 0 to 5, then a decrease to 0, and then a sharp increase to 10.

The graph is titled ''Type''.

Therefore, option C is the correct answer.


Question 130

Which are valid ways to create an event type? (select all that apply)



Answer : C, D

Event types are custom categories of events that are based on search criteria. Event types can be used to label events with meaningful names, such as error, success, login, logout, etc. Event types can also be used to create transactions, alerts, reports, dashboards, etc. Event types can be created in two ways:

By going to the Settings menu and clicking Event Types > New. This will open a form where you can enter the name, description, search string, app context, and tags for the event type.

By selecting an event in search results and clicking Event Actions > Build Event Type. This will open a dialog box where you can enter the name and description for the event type. The search string will be automatically populated based on the selected event.

Event types cannot be created by using the searchtypes command in the search bar, as this command does not exist in Splunk. Event types can also be created by editing the event_type stanza in the transforms.conf file, not the props.conf file.


Question 131

What is the correct syntax to find events associated with a tag?



Answer : D

The correct syntax to find events associated with a tag in Splunk is tag=<value>1. So, the correct answer is D) tag=<value>. This syntax allows you to annotate specified fields in your search results with tags1.

In Splunk, tags are a type of knowledge object that you can use to add meaningful aliases to field values in your data1. For example, if you have a field called status_code in your data, you might have different status codes like 200, 404, 500, etc. You can create tags for these status codes like success for 200, not_found for 404, and server_error for 500. Then, you can use the tag command in your searches to find events associated with these tags1.

Here is an example of how you can use the tag command in a search:

index=main sourcetype=access_combined | tag status_code

In this search, the tag command annotates the status_code field in the search results with the corresponding tags. If you have tagged the status code 200 with success, the status code 404 with not_found, and the status code 500 with server_error, the search results will include these tags1.

You can also use the tag command with a specific tag value to find events associated with that tag. For example, the following search finds all events where the status code is tagged with success:

index=main sourcetype=access_combined | tag status_code | search tag::status_code=success

In this search, the tag command annotates the status_code field with the corresponding tags, and the search command filters the results to include only events where the status_code field is tagged with success1.


Question 132

When should transaction be used?



Answer : C


Question 133

which of the following commands are used when creating visualizations(select all that apply.)



Answer : A, C, D

The following commands are used when creating visualizations: geom, geostats, and iplocation. Visualizations are graphical representations of data that show trends, patterns, or comparisons. Visualizations can have different types, such as charts, tables, maps, etc. Visualizations can be created by using various commands that transform the data into a suitable format for the visualization type. Some of the commands that are used when creating visualizations are:

geom: This command is used to create choropleth maps that show geographic regions with different colors based on some metric. The geom command takes a KMZ file as an argument that defines the geographic regions and their boundaries. The geom command also takes a field name as an argument that specifies the metric to use for coloring the regions.

geostats: This command is used to create cluster maps that show groups of events with different sizes and colors based on some metric. The geostats command takes a latitude and longitude field as arguments that specify the location of the events. The geostats command also takes a statistical function as an argument that specifies the metric to use for sizing and coloring the clusters.

iplocation: This command is used to create location-based visualizations that show events with different attributes based on their IP addresses. The iplocation command takes an IP address field as an argument and adds some additional fields to the events, such as Country, City, Latitude, Longitude, etc. The iplocation command can be used with other commands such as geom or geostats to create maps based on IP addresses.


Question 134

Which workflow action method can be used the action type is set to link?



Answer : A

https://docs.splunk.com/Documentation/Splunk/8.0.2/Knowledge/SetupaGETworkflowaction

Define a GET workflow action

Steps

Navigate toSettings > Fields > Workflow Actions.

ClickNewto open up a new workflow action form.

Define aLabelfor the action.

TheLabelfield enables you to define the text that is displayed in either the field or event workflow menu. Labels can be static or include the value of relevant fields.

Determine whether the workflow action applies to specific fields or event types in your data.

UseApply only to the following fieldsto identify one or more fields. When you identify fields, the workflow action only appears for events that have those fields, either in their event menu or field menus. If you leave it blank or enter an asterisk the action appears in menus for all fields.

UseApply only to the following event typesto identify one or more event types. If you identify an event type, the workflow action only appears in the event menus for events that belong to the event type.

ForShow action indetermine whether you want the action to appear in theEvent menu, theFields menus, orBoth.

SetAction typetolink.

InURIprovide a URI for the location of the external resource that you want to send your field values to.

Similar to theLabelsetting, when you declare the value of a field, you use the name of the field enclosed by dollar signs.

Variables passed in GET actions via URIs are automaticallyURL encodedduring transmission. This means you can include values that have spaces between words or punctuation characters.

UnderOpen link in, determine whether the workflow action displays in the current window or if it opens the link in a new window.

Set theLink methodtoget.

ClickSaveto save your workflow action definition.


Question 135

To which of the following can a field alias be applied?



Answer : B

In Splunk, a field alias is used to create an alternative name for an existing field, making it easier to refer to data in a consistent manner across different searches and reports. Field aliases can be applied to both calculated fields and extracted fields. Calculated fields are those that are created using eval expressions, while extracted fields are typically those parsed from the raw data at index time or search time. This flexibility allows users to streamline their searches by using more intuitive field names without altering the underlying data. Field aliases cannot be applied to data in a lookup table, specific individual fields within a dataset, or directly to a host, source, or sourcetype.


Question 136

Which of the following statements about tags is true? (select all that apply.)



Answer : B, D

The following statements about tags are true: tags are based on field/value pairs and tags categorize events based on a search. Tags are custom labels that can be applied to fields or field values to provide additional context or meaning for your data. Tags can be used to filter or analyze your data based on common concepts or themes. Tags can be created by using various methods, such as search commands, configuration files, user interfaces, etc. Some of the characteristics of tags are:

Tags are based on field/value pairs: This means that tags are associated with a specific field name and a specific field value. For example, you can create a tag called ''alert'' for the field name ''status'' and the field value ''critical''. This means that only events that have status=critical will have the ''alert'' tag applied to them.

Tags categorize events based on a search: This means that tags are defined by a search string that matches the events that you want to tag. For example, you can create a tag called ''web'' for the search string sourcetype=access_combined. This means that only events that match the search string sourcetype=access_combined will have the ''web'' tag applied to them.

The following statements about tags are false: tags are case-insensitive and tags are designed to make data more understandable. Tags are case-sensitive and tags are designed to make data more searchable. Tags are case-sensitive: This means that tags must match the exact case of the field name and field value that they are associated with. For example, if you create a tag called ''alert'' for the field name ''status'' and the field value ''critical'', it will not apply to events that have status=CRITICAL or Status=critical. Tags are designed to make data more searchable: This means that tags can help you find relevant events or patterns in your data by using common concepts or themes. For example, if you create a tag called ''web'' for the search string sourcetype=access_combined, you can use tag=web to find all events related to web activity.


Question 137

When is a GET workflow action needed?



Answer : B


Question 138

Which knowledge Object does the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) use to normalize dat

a. in addition to field aliases, event types, and tags?



Answer : B

Normalize your data for each of these fields using a combination of field aliases, field extractions, and lookups.

https://docs.splunk.com/Documentation/CIM/4.15.0/User/UsetheCIMtonormalizedataatsearchtime


Question 139
Question 140

What are search macros?



Question 141

The limit attribute will___________.



Answer : A


Question 142

Which field will be used to populate the field if the productName and product:d fields have values for a given event?



Answer : B

The correct answer is B. The value for the productName field because it appears first.

The coalesce function is an eval function that takes an arbitrary number of arguments and returns the first value that is not null. A null value means that the field has no value at all, while an empty value means that the field has a value, but it is '''' or zero-length1.

The coalesce function can be used to combine fields that have different names but represent the same data, such as IP address or user name. The coalesce function can also be used to rename fields for clarity or convenience2.

The syntax for the coalesce function is:

coalesce(<field1>,<field2>,...)

The coalesce function will return the value of the first field that is not null in the argument list. If all fields are null, the coalesce function will return null.

For example, if you have a set of events where the IP address is extracted to either clientip or ipaddress, you can use the coalesce function to define a new field called ip, that takes the value of either clientip or ipaddress, depending on which is not null:

| eval ip=coalesce(clientip,ipaddress)

In your example, you have a set of events where the product name is extracted to either productName or productid, and you use the coalesce function to define a new field called productINFO, that takes the value of either productName or productid, depending on which is not null:

| eval productINFO=coalesce(productName,productid)

If both productName and productid fields have values for a given event, the coalesce function will return the value of the productName field because it appears first in the argument list. The productid field will be ignored by the coalesce function.

Therefore, the value for the productName field will be used to populate the productINFO field if both fields have values for a given event.


Search Command> Coalesce

USAGE OF SPLUNK EVAL FUNCTION : COALESCE

Question 143
Question 144

After manually editing; a regular expression (regex), which of the following statements is true?



Answer : B

After manually editing a regular expression (regex) that was created using the Field Extractor (FX) UI, it is no longer possible to edit the field extraction in the FX UI. The FX UI is a tool that helps you extract fields from your data using delimiters or regular expressions. The FX UI can generate a regex for you based on your selection of sample values or you can enter your own regex in the FX UI. However, if you edit the regex manually in the props.conf file, the FX UI will not be able to recognize the changes and will not let you edit the field extraction in the FX UI anymore. You will have to use the props.conf file to make any further changes to the field extraction. Changes made manually cannot be reverted in the FX UI, as the FX UI does not keep track of the changes made in the props.conf file. It is possible to manually edit a regex that was created using the FX UI, as long as you do it in the props.conf file.

Therefore, only statement B is true about manually editing a regex.


Question 145

Which of the following statements describe the search string below?

| datamodel Application_State All_Application_State search



Answer : B

The search string below returns events from the data model named Application_State.

| datamodel Application_State All_Application_State search

The search string does the following:

It uses the datamodel command to access a data model in Splunk. The datamodel command takes two arguments: the name of the data model and the name of the dataset within the data model.

It specifies the name of the data model as Application_State. This is a predefined data model in Splunk that contains information about web applications.

It specifies the name of the dataset as All_Application_State. This is a root dataset in the data model that contains all events from all child datasets.

It uses the search command to filter and transform the events from the dataset. The search command can use any search criteria or command to modify the results.

Therefore, the search string returns events from the data model named Application_State.


Question 146
Question 147

A user wants to convert numeric field values to strings and also to sort on those values.

Which command should be used first, the eval or the sort?



Question 148

What fields does the transaction command add to the raw events? (select all that apply)



Question 149

Which command is used to create choropleth maps?



Answer : C


Question 150
Question 151

Clicking a SEGMENT on a chart, ________.



Answer : C


Question 152

Consider the following search:

index=web sourcetype=access_corabined

The log shows several events that share the same jsesszonid value (SD462K101O2F267). View the events as a group.

From the following list, which search groups events by jSSESSIONID?



Question 153

Data models are composed of one or more of which of the following datasets? (select all that apply)



Answer : A, B, C

Data model datasets have a hierarchical relationship with each other, meaning they have parent-child relationships. Data models can contain multiple dataset hierarchies. There are three types of dataset hierarchies: event, search, and transaction.

https://docs.splunk.com/Splexicon:Datamodeldataset


Question 154

Which of these stats commands will show the total bytes for each unique combination of page and server?



Answer : B

The correct command to show the total bytes for each unique combination of page and server isindex=web | stats sum (bytes) BY page server. In Splunk, thestatscommand is used to calculate aggregate statistics over the dataset, such as count, sum, avg, etc. When using theBYclause, it groups the results by the specified fields. The correct syntax does not include commas or the word 'AND' between the field names. Instead, it simply lists the field names separated by spaces within theBYclause.

Reference: The usage of thestatscommand with theBYclause is confirmed by examples in the Splunk Community, where it's explained thatstatswith aby foo barwill output one row for every unique combination of thebyfields1.


Question 155
Question 156

In which Settings section are macros defined?



Answer : C


Question 157
Question 158

Which field will be used to populate the field if the productName and product:d fields have values for a given event?



Answer : B

The correct answer is B. The value for the productName field because it appears first.

The coalesce function is an eval function that takes an arbitrary number of arguments and returns the first value that is not null. A null value means that the field has no value at all, while an empty value means that the field has a value, but it is '''' or zero-length1.

The coalesce function can be used to combine fields that have different names but represent the same data, such as IP address or user name. The coalesce function can also be used to rename fields for clarity or convenience2.

The syntax for the coalesce function is:

coalesce(<field1>,<field2>,...)

The coalesce function will return the value of the first field that is not null in the argument list. If all fields are null, the coalesce function will return null.

For example, if you have a set of events where the IP address is extracted to either clientip or ipaddress, you can use the coalesce function to define a new field called ip, that takes the value of either clientip or ipaddress, depending on which is not null:

| eval ip=coalesce(clientip,ipaddress)

In your example, you have a set of events where the product name is extracted to either productName or productid, and you use the coalesce function to define a new field called productINFO, that takes the value of either productName or productid, depending on which is not null:

| eval productINFO=coalesce(productName,productid)

If both productName and productid fields have values for a given event, the coalesce function will return the value of the productName field because it appears first in the argument list. The productid field will be ignored by the coalesce function.

Therefore, the value for the productName field will be used to populate the productINFO field if both fields have values for a given event.


Search Command> Coalesce

USAGE OF SPLUNK EVAL FUNCTION : COALESCE

Question 159

When using the transaction command, what does the argument maxspan do?



Answer : C


Question 160

Given the macro definition below, what should be entered into the Name and Arguments fileds to correctly configured the macro?



Answer : B


The macro definition below shows a macro that tracks user sessions based on two arguments: action and JSESSIONID.

sessiontracker(2)

The macro definition does the following:

It specifies the name of the macro as sessiontracker. This is the name that will be used to execute the macro in a search string.

It specifies the number of arguments for the macro as 2. This indicates that the macro takes two arguments when it is executed.

It specifies the code for the macro as index=main sourcetype=access_combined_wcookie action=$action$ JSESSIONID=$JSESSIONID$ | stats count by JSESSIONID. This is the search string that will be run when the macro is executed. The search string can contain any part of a search, such as search terms, commands, arguments, etc. The search string can also include variables for the arguments using dollar signs around them. In this case, action and JSESSIONID are variables for the arguments that will be replaced by their values when the macro is executed.

Therefore, to correctly configure the macro, you should enter sessiontracker as the name and action, JSESSIONID as the arguments. Alternatively, you can use sessiontracker(2) as the name and leave the arguments blank.

Question 161

How are arguments defined within the macro search string?



Answer : A

Arguments are defined within the macro search string by using dollar signs on either side of the argument name, such as arg1 or fragment.

Reference

Search macro examples

Define search macros in Settings

Use search macros in searches


Question 162

Where are the descriptions of the data models that come with the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) Add-on documented?



Answer : D

The CIM Add-on manual contains the descriptions of the data models that come with the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) Add-on, as well as how to set up, use, and customize the add-on.

Reference

CIM Add-on manual

Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) | Splunkbase

Understand and use the Common Information Model Add-on - Splunk


Question 163

How do event types help a user search their data?



Answer : D

Event types allow users to assign labels to events based on predefined search strings. This helps categorize data and makes it easier to reference specific sets of events in future searches.


Splunk Docs - Event types

Question 164

Which of the following knowledge objects can reference field aliases?



Answer : A

Field aliases in Splunk are alternate names assigned to fields. These can be particularly useful for normalizing data from different sources or simply for making field names more intuitive. Once an alias is created for a field, it can be used across various Splunk knowledge objects, enhancing their flexibility and utility.

A . Calculated fields, lookups, event types, and tags: This is the correct answer. Field aliases can indeed be referenced in calculated fields, lookups, event types, and tags within Splunk. When you create an alias for a field, that alias can then be used in these knowledge objects just like any standard field name.

Calculated fields: These are expressions that can create new field values based on existing data. You can use an alias in a calculated field expression to refer to the original field.

Lookups: These are used to enrich your event data by referencing external data sources. If you've created an alias for a field that matches a field in your lookup table, you can use that alias in your lookup configurations.

Event types: These are classifications for events that meet certain search criteria. You can use field aliases in the search criteria for defining an event type.

Tags: These allow you to assign meaningful labels to data, making it easier to search and report on. You can use field aliases in the search criteria that you tag.


Question 165

It is mandatory for the lookup file to have this for an automatic lookup to work.



Answer : D


Question 166

What does the fillnull command replace null values with, if the value argument is not specified?



Answer : A

The fillnull command replaces null values with 0 by default, if the value argument is not specified. You can use the value argument to specify a different value to replace null values with, such as N/A or NULL.


Question 167

There are several ways to access the field extractor. Which option automatically identifies data type, source type, and sample event?



Answer : B

There are several ways to access the field extractor. The option that automatically identifies data type, source type, and sample event is Fields sidebar > Extract New Field. The field extractor is a tool that helps you extract fields from your data using delimiters or regular expressions. The field extractor can generate a regex for you based on your selection of sample values or you can enter your own regex in the field extractor. The field extractor can be accessed by using various methods, such as:

Fields sidebar > Extract New Field: This is the easiest way to access the field extractor. The fields sidebar is a panel that shows all available fields for your data and their values. When you click on Extract New Field in the fields sidebar, Splunk will automatically identify the data type, source type, and sample event for your data based on your current search criteria. You can then use the field extractor to select sample values and generate a regex for your new field.

Event Actions > Extract Fields: This is another way to access the field extractor. Event actions are actions that you can perform on individual events in your search results, such as viewing event details, adding to report, adding to dashboard, etc. When you click on Extract Fields in the event actions menu, Splunk will use the current event as the sample event for your data and ask you to select the source type and data type for your data. You can then use the field extractor to select sample values and generate a regex for your new field.

Settings > Field Extractions > New Field Extraction: This is a more advanced way to access the field extractor. Settings is a menu that allows you to configure various aspects of Splunk, such as indexes, inputs, outputs, users, roles, apps, etc. When you click on New Field Extraction in the Settings menu, Splunk will ask you to enter all the details for your new field extraction manually, such as app context, name, source type, data type, sample event, regex, etc. You can then use the field extractor to verify or modify your regex for your new field.


Question 168

How is a variable for a macro defined?



Answer : C

In Splunk, a variable for a macro is defined by placing the variable name inside dollar signs, like this: $variable name$. This syntax allows the macro to dynamically replace the variable with the appropriate value when the macro is invoked within a search. Using this method ensures that the search strings can be dynamically adjusted based on the variable's value at runtime.


Splunk Docs: Use macros

Splunk Answers: Defining and Using Macros

Question 169

Which of the following is true about the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM)?



Answer : D

The Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) is an app that contains a set of predefined data models that apply a common structure and naming convention to data from any source. The CIM enables you to use data from different sources in a consistent and coherent way. The CIM contains 28 pre-configured datasets that cover various domains such as authentication, network traffic, web, email, etc. The data models included in the CIM are configured with data model acceleration turned on by default, which means that they are optimized for faster searches and analysis. Data model acceleration creates and maintains summary data for the data models, which reduces the amount of raw data that needs to be scanned when you run a search using a data model.

: Splunk Core Certified Power User Track, page 10. : Splunk Documentation, About the Splunk Common Information Model.


Question 170
Question 171

Which of the following statements describe GET workflow actions?



Answer : D

GET workflow actions are custom actions that open a URL link when you click on a field value in your search results. GET workflow actions can be configured with various options, such as label name, base URL, URI parameters, app context, etc. One of the options is to choose whether to open the URL link in the current window or in a new window. GET workflow actions do not have to be configured with POST arguments, as they use GET method to send requests to web servers. Configuration of GET workflow actions does not include choosing a sourcetype, as they do not generate any data in Splunk. Label names for GET workflow actions must include a field name surrounded by dollar signs, as this indicates the field value that will be used to replace the variable in the URL link.


Question 172

Which of the following data models are included in the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) add-on? (select all that apply)



Answer : B, D

The Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) Add-on includes a variety of data models designed to normalize data from different sources to allow for cross-source reporting and analysis. Among the data models included, Alerts (Option B) and Email (Option D) are part of the CIM. The Alerts data model is used for data related to alerts and incidents, while the Email data model is used for data pertaining to email messages and transactions. User permissions (Option A) and Databases (Option C) are not data models included in the CIM; rather, they pertain to aspects of data access control and specific types of data sources, respectively, which are outside the scope of the CIM's predefined data models.


Question 173

Which of the following statements is true about the root dataset of a data model?



Answer : B

In Splunk, a data model's root dataset is the foundational element upon which the rest of the data model is built. The root dataset can be of various types, including search, transaction, or event-based datasets. One of the key features of the root dataset is that it automatically inherits the knowledge objects associated with its base search. These knowledge objects include field extractions, lookups, aliases, and calculated fields that are defined for the base search, ensuring that the root dataset has all necessary contextual information from the outset. This allows users to build upon this dataset with additional child datasets and objects without having to redefine the base search's knowledge objects.


Question 174

When using the timechart command, how can a user group the events into buckets based on time?



Answer : A


Question 175

Which function should you use with the transaction command to set the maximum total time between the earliest and latest events returned?



Answer : D

The maxspan function of the transaction command allows you to set the maximum total time between the earliest and latest events returned. The maxspan function is an argument that can be used with the transaction command to specify the start and end constraints for the transactions. The maxspan function takes a time modifier as its value, such as 30s, 5m, 1h, etc. The maxspan function sets the maximum time span between the first and last events in a transaction. If the time span between the first and last events exceeds the maxspan value, the transaction will be split into multiple transactions.


Question 176
Question 177

The transaction command allows you to __________ events across multiple sources



Answer : B

The transaction command allows you to correlate events across multiple sources. The transaction command is a search command that allows you to group events into transactions based on some common characteristics, such as fields, time, or both. A transaction is a group of events that share one or more fields that relate them to each other. A transaction can span across multiple sources or sourcetypes that have different formats or structures of data. The transaction command can help you correlate events across multiple sources by using the common fields as the basis for grouping. The transaction command can also create some additional fields for each transaction, such as duration, eventcount, startime, etc.


Question 178

Which of the following statements about tags is true?



Answer : B

Tags are a knowledge object that allow you to assign an alias to one or more field values . Tags are applied to events at search time and can be used as search terms or filters .

Tags can help you make your data more understandable by replacing cryptic or complex field values with meaningful names . For example, you can tag the value200in thestatusfield assuccess, or tag the value404asnot_found.


Question 179

In the following eval statement, what is the value of description if the status is 503? index=main | eval description=case(status==200, "OK", status==404, "Not found", status==500, "Internal Server Error")



Question 180

which of the following commands are used when creating visualizations(select all that apply.)



Answer : A, C, D

The following commands are used when creating visualizations: geom, geostats, and iplocation. Visualizations are graphical representations of data that show trends, patterns, or comparisons. Visualizations can have different types, such as charts, tables, maps, etc. Visualizations can be created by using various commands that transform the data into a suitable format for the visualization type. Some of the commands that are used when creating visualizations are:

geom: This command is used to create choropleth maps that show geographic regions with different colors based on some metric. The geom command takes a KMZ file as an argument that defines the geographic regions and their boundaries. The geom command also takes a field name as an argument that specifies the metric to use for coloring the regions.

geostats: This command is used to create cluster maps that show groups of events with different sizes and colors based on some metric. The geostats command takes a latitude and longitude field as arguments that specify the location of the events. The geostats command also takes a statistical function as an argument that specifies the metric to use for sizing and coloring the clusters.

iplocation: This command is used to create location-based visualizations that show events with different attributes based on their IP addresses. The iplocation command takes an IP address field as an argument and adds some additional fields to the events, such as Country, City, Latitude, Longitude, etc. The iplocation command can be used with other commands such as geom or geostats to create maps based on IP addresses.


Question 181

When a search returns __________, you can view the results as a list.



Answer : C


Question 182

When does the CIM add-on apply preconfigured data models to the data?



Answer : A

The Common Information Model (CIM) add-on in Splunk applies preconfigured data models to data at search time. This means that when a search is executed, the CIM add-on uses its predefined data models to normalize and map the relevant data to a common format. This approach ensures that data is interpreted and analyzed consistently across various datasets without modifying the data at index time.


Splunk Docs: About the Common Information Model

Splunk Answers: CIM Add-on Data Models

Question 183

It is mandatory for the lookup file to have this for an automatic lookup to work.



Answer : D


Question 184

What does the fillnull command do in this search?

index=main sourcetype=http_log | fillnull value="Unknown" src



Answer : C

The fillnull command in Splunk is used to replace null (missing) field values with a specified value.

Explanation of options:

A: Incorrect, as fillnull does not set fields to null; it fills null values with a specific value.

B: Incorrect, as the command only affects the specified field (src in this case).

C: Correct, as the fillnull command explicitly sets null values in the src field to 'Unknown'.

D: Incorrect, as only the src field is affected, not all fields.

Example:

If the src field is null for some events, fillnull will populate 'Unknown' in those cases.


Question 185

By default search results are not returned in ________ order.



Answer : A, D


Question 186

Which of the following statements describe the search below? (select all that apply)

Index=main I transaction clientip host maxspan=30s maxpause=5s



Answer : A, B, D

The search below groups events by two or more fields (clientip and host), creates transactions with start and end constraints (maxspan=30s and maxpause=5s), and calculates the duration of each transaction.

index=main | transaction clientip host maxspan=30s maxpause=5s

The search does the following:

It filters the events by the index main, which is a default index in Splunk that contains all data that is not sent to other indexes.

It uses the transaction command to group events into transactions based on two fields: clientip and host. The transaction command creates new events from groups of events that share the same clientip and host values.

It specifies the start and end constraints for the transactions using the maxspan and maxpause arguments. The maxspan argument sets the maximum time span between the first and last events in a transaction. The maxpause argument sets the maximum time span between any two consecutive events in a transaction. In this case, the maxspan is 30 seconds and the maxpause is 5 seconds, meaning that any transaction that has a longer time span or pause will be split into multiple transactions.

It creates some additional fields for each transaction, such as duration, eventcount, startime, etc. The duration field shows the time span between the first and last events in a transaction.


Question 187

Which of the following statements about calculated fields in Splunk is true?



Answer : B

The correct answer is B. Calculated fields can be chained together to create more complex fields.

Calculated fields are fields that are added to events at search time by using eval expressions. They can be used to perform calculations with the values of two or more fields already present in those events. Calculated fields can be defined with Splunk Web or in the props.conf file. They can be used in searches, reports, dashboards, and data models like any other extracted field1.

Calculated fields can also be chained together to create more complex fields. This means that you can use a calculated field as an input for another calculated field. For example, if you have a calculated field named total that sums up the values of two fields named price and tax, you can use the total field to create another calculated field named discount that applies a percentage discount to the total field. To do this, you need to define the discount field with an eval expression that references the total field, such as:

discount = total * 0.9

This will create a new field named discount that is equal to 90% of the total field value for each event2.


About calculated fields

Chaining calculated fields

Question 188

Which statement is true?



Answer : C

The statement that pivot is used for creating reports and dashboards is true. Pivot is a graphical interface that allows you to create tables, charts, and visualizations from data models. Data models are structured datasets that define how data is organized and categorized. Pivot does not create datasets, but uses existing ones.


Question 189
Question 190

In most large Splunk environments, what is the most efficient command that can be used to group events by fields/



Answer : B

https://docs.splunk.com/Documentation/Splunk/8.0.2/Search/Abouttransactions

In other cases, it's usually better to use thestatscommand, which performs more efficiently, especially in a distributed environment. Often there is a unique ID in the events andstatscan be used.


Question 191
Question 192

When a search returns __________, you can view the results as a list.



Answer : C


Question 193

When should you use the transaction command instead of the scats command?



Answer : D

The transaction command is used to group events into transactions based on some common characteristics, such as fields, time, or both. The transaction command can also specify start and end constraints for the transactions, such as a field value that indicates the beginning or the end of a transaction. The stats command is used to calculate summary statistics on the events, such as count, sum, average, etc. The stats command cannot group events based on start and end constraints, but only on fields or time buckets. Therefore, the transaction command should be used instead of the stats command when you need to group events based on start and end constraints.


Question 194

When using timechart, how many fields can be listed after a by clause?



Question 195

Which type of visualization shows relationships between discrete values in three dimensions?



Question 196

What other syntax will produce exactly the same results as | chart count over vendor_action by user?



Question 197

There are several ways to access the field extractor. Which option automatically identifies data type, source type, and sample event?



Answer : B

There are several ways to access the field extractor. The option that automatically identifies data type, source type, and sample event is Fields sidebar > Extract New Field. The field extractor is a tool that helps you extract fields from your data using delimiters or regular expressions. The field extractor can generate a regex for you based on your selection of sample values or you can enter your own regex in the field extractor. The field extractor can be accessed by using various methods, such as:

Fields sidebar > Extract New Field: This is the easiest way to access the field extractor. The fields sidebar is a panel that shows all available fields for your data and their values. When you click on Extract New Field in the fields sidebar, Splunk will automatically identify the data type, source type, and sample event for your data based on your current search criteria. You can then use the field extractor to select sample values and generate a regex for your new field.

Event Actions > Extract Fields: This is another way to access the field extractor. Event actions are actions that you can perform on individual events in your search results, such as viewing event details, adding to report, adding to dashboard, etc. When you click on Extract Fields in the event actions menu, Splunk will use the current event as the sample event for your data and ask you to select the source type and data type for your data. You can then use the field extractor to select sample values and generate a regex for your new field.

Settings > Field Extractions > New Field Extraction: This is a more advanced way to access the field extractor. Settings is a menu that allows you to configure various aspects of Splunk, such as indexes, inputs, outputs, users, roles, apps, etc. When you click on New Field Extraction in the Settings menu, Splunk will ask you to enter all the details for your new field extraction manually, such as app context, name, source type, data type, sample event, regex, etc. You can then use the field extractor to verify or modify your regex for your new field.


Question 198

A user wants to convert numeric field values to strings and also to sort on those values.

Which command should be used first, the eval or the sort?



Question 199

What is a benefit of installing the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) add-on?



Answer : B

It provides users with a standardized set of field names and tags to normalize data.

The Splunk CIM add-on provides a standardized set of field names and data models, which allows users to normalize and categorize data from various sources into a common format. This helps with data interoperability and enables faster, more consistent reporting and searching across different data sources.


Splunk Documentation - Common Information Model (CIM)

Question 200

Which of the following statements describes macros?



Answer : C


A macro is a reusable search string that can contain any part of a search, such as search terms, commands, arguments, etc. A macro can have a flexible time range that can be specified when the macro is executed. A macro can also have arguments that can be passed to the macro when it is executed. A macro can be created by using the Settings menu or by editing the macros.conf file. A macro does not have to contain the full search, but only the part that needs to be reused. A macro does not have to have a fixed time range, but can use a relative or absolute time range modifier. A macro does not have to contain only a portion of the search, but can contain multiple parts of the search.

Question 201

A calculated field may be based on which of the following?



Answer : D

In Splunk, calculated fields allow you to create new fields using expressions that can transform or combine the values of existing fields. Although all options provided might seem viable, when selecting only one option that is most representative of a calculated field, we typically refer to:

D . Extracted fields: Calculated fields are often based on fields that have already been extracted from your data.

Extracted fields are those that Splunk has identified and pulled out from the event data based on patterns, delimiters, or other methods such as regular expressions or automatic extractions. These fields can then be used in expressions to create calculated fields.

For example, you might have an extracted field for the time in seconds, and you want to create a calculated field for the time in minutes. You would use the extracted field in a calculation to create the new field.


Question 202
Question 203
Question 204

What is the correct way to name a macro with two arguments?



Answer : D


Question 205

which of the following are valid options with the chart command



Answer : A, B


Question 206

When using the timechart command, how can a user group the events into buckets based on time?



Answer : A


Question 207

The gauge command:



Answer : B


Question 208

What is needed to define a calculated field?



Answer : A

A calculated field in Splunk is created using an eval expression, which allows users to perform calculations or transformations on field values during search time.


Splunk Docs - Calculated fields

Question 209

What are the expected results for a search that contains the command | where A=B?



Answer : C

The correct answer is C. Events where values of field A are equal to values of field B.

The where command is used to filter the search results based on an expression that evaluates to true or false. The where command can compare two fields, two values, or a field and a value. The where command can also use functions, operators, and wildcards to create complex expressions1.

The syntax for the where command is:

| where <expression>

The expression can be a comparison, a calculation, a logical operation, or a combination of these. The expression must evaluate to true or false for each event.

To compare two fields with the where command, you need to use the field names without any quotation marks. For example, if you want to find events where the values for the field A match the values for the field B, you can use the following syntax:

| where A=B

This will return only the events where the two fields have the same value.

The other options are not correct because they use different syntax or fields that are not related to the where command. These options are:

A) Events that contain the string value where A=B: This option uses the string value where A=B as a search term, which is not valid syntax for the where command. This option will return events that have the literal text ''where A=B'' in them.

B) Events that contain the string value A=B: This option uses the string value A=B as a search term, which is not valid syntax for the where command. This option will return events that have the literal text ''A=B'' in them.

D) Events where field A contains the string value B: This option uses quotation marks around the value B, which is not valid syntax for comparing fields with the where command. Quotation marks are used to enclose phrases or exact matches in a search2. This option will return events where the field A contains the string value ''B''.


where command usage

Search command cheatsheet

Question 210

After manually editing; a regular expression (regex), which of the following statements is true?



Answer : B

After manually editing a regular expression (regex) that was created using the Field Extractor (FX) UI, it is no longer possible to edit the field extraction in the FX UI. The FX UI is a tool that helps you extract fields from your data using delimiters or regular expressions. The FX UI can generate a regex for you based on your selection of sample values or you can enter your own regex in the FX UI. However, if you edit the regex manually in the props.conf file, the FX UI will not be able to recognize the changes and will not let you edit the field extraction in the FX UI anymore. You will have to use the props.conf file to make any further changes to the field extraction. Changes made manually cannot be reverted in the FX UI, as the FX UI does not keep track of the changes made in the props.conf file. It is possible to manually edit a regex that was created using the FX UI, as long as you do it in the props.conf file.

Therefore, only statement B is true about manually editing a regex.


Question 211
Question 212

The stats command will create a _____________ by default.



Answer : A


Question 213

In the following eval statement, what is the value of description if the status is 503? index=main | eval description=case(status==200, "OK", status==404, "Not found", status==500, "Internal Server Error")



Question 214

When performing a regex field extraction with the Field Extractor (FX), a data type must be chosen before a sample event can be selected. Which of the following data types are supported?



Answer : D

When using the Field Extractor (FX) in Splunk for regex field extraction, it's important to select the context in which you want to perform the extraction. The context is essentially the subset of data you're focusing on for your field extraction task.

D . Sourcetype or source: This is the correct option. In the initial steps of using the Field Extractor tool, you're prompted to choose a data type for your field extraction. The options available are typically based on the nature of your data and how it's organized in Splunk. 'Sourcetype' refers to the kind of data you're dealing with, a categorization that helps Splunk apply specific processing rules. 'Source' refers to the origin of the data, like a specific log file or data input. By selecting either a sourcetype or source, you're narrowing down the dataset on which you'll perform the regex extraction, making it more manageable and relevant.


Question 215
Question 216

When does the CIM add-on apply preconfigured data models to the data?



Answer : A

The Common Information Model (CIM) add-on in Splunk applies preconfigured data models to data at search time. This means that when a search is executed, the CIM add-on uses its predefined data models to normalize and map the relevant data to a common format. This approach ensures that data is interpreted and analyzed consistently across various datasets without modifying the data at index time.


Splunk Docs: About the Common Information Model

Splunk Answers: CIM Add-on Data Models

Question 217
Question 218
Question 219

This is what Splunk uses to categorize the data that is being indexed.



Answer : B


Question 220
Question 221
Question 222

How can an existing accelerated data model be edited?



Answer : C

An existing accelerated data model can be edited, but the data model must be de-accelerated before any structural edits can be made (Option C). This is because the acceleration process involves pre-computing and storing data, and changes to the data model's structure could invalidate or conflict with the pre-computed data. Once the data model is de-accelerated and edits are completed, it can be re-accelerated to optimize performance.


Question 223
Question 224

When is a GET workflow action needed?



Answer : B


Question 225

These users can create global knowledge objects. (Select all that apply.)



Answer : B, C


Question 226

When extracting fields, we may choose to use our own regular expressions



Answer : A


Question 227
Question 228

Which of the following describes this search?

New Search

'third_party_outages(EMEA,-24h)'



Question 229

How many ways are there to access the Field Extractor Utility?



Answer : A


Question 230

Which method in the Field Extractor would extract the port number from the following event? |

10/20/2022 - 125.24.20.1 ++++ port 54 - user: admin



Answer : B

The rex command allows you to extract fields from events using regular expressions. You can use the rex command to specify a named group that matches the port number in the event. For example:

rex '\+\+\+\+port (?\d+)'

This will create a field called port with the value 54 for the event.

The delimiter method is not suitable for this event because there is no consistent delimiter between the fields. The regular expression method is not a valid option for the Field Extractor tool. The Field Extractor tool can extract regular expressions, but it is not a method by itself.


Question 231
Question 232

These allow you to categorize events based on search terms.

Select your answer.



Answer : B


Question 233
Question 234

This is what Splunk uses to categorize the data that is being indexed.



Answer : B


Question 235

Which of the following searches would return a report of sales by product-name?



Question 236
Question 237

What is a benefit of installing the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) add-on?



Answer : B

It provides users with a standardized set of field names and tags to normalize data.

The Splunk CIM add-on provides a standardized set of field names and data models, which allows users to normalize and categorize data from various sources into a common format. This helps with data interoperability and enables faster, more consistent reporting and searching across different data sources.


Splunk Documentation - Common Information Model (CIM)

Question 238

The limit attribute will___________.



Answer : A


Question 239

The stats command will create a _____________ by default.



Answer : A


Question 240

When a search returns __________, you can view the results as a list.



Answer : C


Question 241
Question 242
Question 243

Data models are composed of one or more of which of the following datasets? (select all that apply)



Answer : A, B, C

Data model datasets have a hierarchical relationship with each other, meaning they have parent-child relationships. Data models can contain multiple dataset hierarchies. There are three types of dataset hierarchies: event, search, and transaction.

https://docs.splunk.com/Splexicon:Datamodeldataset


Question 244
Question 245
Question 246

Which of the following is true about a datamodel that has been accelerated?



Answer : A

A data model that has been accelerated can be used with Pivot, the | tstats command, or the | datamodel command (Option A). Acceleration pre-computes and stores results for quicker access, enhancing the performance of searches and analyses that utilize the data model, especially for large datasets. This makes accelerated data models highly efficient for use in various analytical tools and commands within Splunk.


Question 247

Consider the following search:

index=web sourcetype=access_combined

The log shows several events that share the same JSESSIONID value (SD470K92802F117). View the events as a group.

From the following list, which search groups events by JSESSIONID?



Answer : B

To group events by JSESSIONID, the correct search is index=web sourcetype=access_combined | transaction JSESSIONID | search SD470K92802F117 (Option B). The transaction command groups events that share the same JSESSIONID value, allowing for the analysis of all events associated with a specific session as a single transaction. The subsequent search for SD470K92802F117 filters these grouped transactions to include only those related to the specified session ID.


Question 248

The eval command 'if' function requires the following three arguments (in order):



Answer : A

The eval command 'if' function requires the following three arguments (in order): boolean expression, result if true, result if false. The eval command is a search command that allows you to create new fields or modify existing fields by performing calculations or transformations on them. The eval command can use various functions to perform different operations on fields. The 'if' function is one of the functions that can be used with the eval command to perform conditional evaluations on fields. The 'if' function takes three arguments: a boolean expression that evaluates to true or false, a result that will be returned if the boolean expression is true, and a result that will be returned if the boolean expression is false. The 'if' function returns one of the two results based on the evaluation of the boolean expression.


Question 249
Question 250
Question 251

Given the following eval statement:

... | eval field1 = if(isnotnull(field1),field1,0), field2 = if(isnull(field2), "NO-VALUE", field2)

Which of the following is the equivalent using fillnull?



Answer : D

The fillnull command can be used to replace null values in specific fields. The correct equivalent expression for the given eval statement would involve using fillnull twice, once for field1 to replace null values with 0, and once for field2 to replace null values with 'NO-VALUE'.


Splunk Docs - fillnull command

Question 252

When would a user select delimited field extractions using the Field Extractor (FX)?



Answer : A

The correct answer is A. When a log file has values that are separated by the same character, for example, commas.

The Field Extractor (FX) is a utility in Splunk Web that allows you to create new fields from your events by using either regular expressions or delimiters. The FX provides a graphical interface that guides you through the steps of defining and testing your field extractions1.

The FX supports two field extraction methods: regular expression and delimited. The regular expression method works best with unstructured event data, such as logs or messages, that do not have a consistent format or structure. You select a sample event and highlight one or more fields to extract from that event, and the FX generates a regular expression that matches similar events in your data set and extracts the fields from them1.

The delimited method is designed for structured event data: data from files with headers, where all of the fields in the events are separated by a common delimiter, such as a comma, a tab, or a space. You select a sample event, identify the delimiter, and then rename the fields that the FX finds1.

Therefore, you would select the delimited field extraction method when you have a log file that has values that are separated by the same character, for example, commas. This method will allow you to easily extract the fields based on the delimiter without writing complex regular expressions.

The other options are not correct because they are not suitable for the delimited field extraction method. These options are:

B) When a log file contains empty lines or comments: This option does not indicate that the log file has a structured format or a common delimiter. The delimited method might not work well with this type of data, as it might miss some fields or include some unwanted values.

C) With structured files such as JSON or XML: This option does not require the delimited method, as Splunk can automatically extract fields from JSON or XML files by using indexed extractions or search-time extractions2. The delimited method might not work well with this type of data, as it might not recognize the nested structure or the special characters.

D) When the file has a header that might provide information about its structure or format: This option does not indicate that the file has a common delimiter between the fields. The delimited method might not work well with this type of data, as it might not be able to identify the fields based on the header information.


Build field extractions with the field extractor

Configure indexed field extraction

Question 253

A POST workflow action will pass which types of arguments to an external website?



Answer : B

A POST workflow action in Splunk is designed to send data to an external web service by using HTTP POST requests. This type of workflow action can pass a combination of clear text strings and variables derived from the search results or event data. The clear text strings might include static text or predefined values, while the variables are dynamic elements that represent specific fields or values extracted from the Splunk events. This flexibility allows for constructing detailed and context-specific requests to external systems, enabling various integration and automation scenarios. The POST request can include both types of data, making it versatile for different use cases.


Question 254

Which of the following statements is true about the root dataset of a data model?



Answer : B

In Splunk, a data model's root dataset is the foundational element upon which the rest of the data model is built. The root dataset can be of various types, including search, transaction, or event-based datasets. One of the key features of the root dataset is that it automatically inherits the knowledge objects associated with its base search. These knowledge objects include field extractions, lookups, aliases, and calculated fields that are defined for the base search, ensuring that the root dataset has all necessary contextual information from the outset. This allows users to build upon this dataset with additional child datasets and objects without having to redefine the base search's knowledge objects.


Question 255
Question 256

To which of the following can a field alias be applied?



Answer : B

In Splunk, a field alias is used to create an alternative name for an existing field, making it easier to refer to data in a consistent manner across different searches and reports. Field aliases can be applied to both calculated fields and extracted fields. Calculated fields are those that are created using eval expressions, while extracted fields are typically those parsed from the raw data at index time or search time. This flexibility allows users to streamline their searches by using more intuitive field names without altering the underlying data. Field aliases cannot be applied to data in a lookup table, specific individual fields within a dataset, or directly to a host, source, or sourcetype.


Question 257

Which of the following statements describes this search?

sourcetype=access_combined I transaction JSESSIONID | timechart avg (duration)



Question 258
Question 259

Which search would limit an "alert" tag to the "host" field?



Answer : D

The search below would limit an ''alert'' tag to the ''host'' field.

tag::host=alert

The search does the following:

It uses tag syntax to filter events by tags. Tags are custom labels that can be applied to fields or field values to provide additional context or meaning for your data.

It specifies tag::host=alert as the tag filter. This means that it will only return events that have an ''alert'' tag applied to their host field or host field value.

It uses an equal sign (=) to indicate an exact match between the tag and the field or field value.


Question 260
Question 261

Which workflow action method can be used the action type is set to link?



Answer : A

https://docs.splunk.com/Documentation/Splunk/8.0.2/Knowledge/SetupaGETworkflowaction

Define a GET workflow action

Steps

Navigate toSettings > Fields > Workflow Actions.

ClickNewto open up a new workflow action form.

Define aLabelfor the action.

TheLabelfield enables you to define the text that is displayed in either the field or event workflow menu. Labels can be static or include the value of relevant fields.

Determine whether the workflow action applies to specific fields or event types in your data.

UseApply only to the following fieldsto identify one or more fields. When you identify fields, the workflow action only appears for events that have those fields, either in their event menu or field menus. If you leave it blank or enter an asterisk the action appears in menus for all fields.

UseApply only to the following event typesto identify one or more event types. If you identify an event type, the workflow action only appears in the event menus for events that belong to the event type.

ForShow action indetermine whether you want the action to appear in theEvent menu, theFields menus, orBoth.

SetAction typetolink.

InURIprovide a URI for the location of the external resource that you want to send your field values to.

Similar to theLabelsetting, when you declare the value of a field, you use the name of the field enclosed by dollar signs.

Variables passed in GET actions via URIs are automaticallyURL encodedduring transmission. This means you can include values that have spaces between words or punctuation characters.

UnderOpen link in, determine whether the workflow action displays in the current window or if it opens the link in a new window.

Set theLink methodtoget.

ClickSaveto save your workflow action definition.


Question 262

Which of the following statements about tags is true?



Answer : C

Tags are aliases or alternative names for field values in Splunk. They can make your data more understandable by using common or descriptive terms instead of cryptic or technical terms. For example, you can tag a field value such as ''200'' with ''OK'' or ''success'' to indicate that it is a HTTP status code for a successful request. Tags are case sensitive, meaning that ''OK'' and ''ok'' are different tags. Tags are created at search time, meaning that they are applied when you run a search on your data. Tags are searched by using the syntaxtag::<tagname>, where<tagname>is the name of the tag you want to search for.


Question 263

Which of these stats commands will show the total bytes for each unique combination of page and server?



Answer : B

The correct command to show the total bytes for each unique combination of page and server isindex=web | stats sum (bytes) BY page server. In Splunk, thestatscommand is used to calculate aggregate statistics over the dataset, such as count, sum, avg, etc. When using theBYclause, it groups the results by the specified fields. The correct syntax does not include commas or the word 'AND' between the field names. Instead, it simply lists the field names separated by spaces within theBYclause.

Reference: The usage of thestatscommand with theBYclause is confirmed by examples in the Splunk Community, where it's explained thatstatswith aby foo barwill output one row for every unique combination of thebyfields1.


Question 264
Question 265

Consider the following search:

Index=web sourcetype=access_combined

The log shows several events that share the same JSESSIONID value (SD404K289O2F151). View the events as a group. From the following list, which search groups events by JSESSIONID?



Answer : B


Question 266
Question 267

These users can create global knowledge objects. (Select all that apply.)



Answer : B, C


Question 268

Which syntax is used to represent an argument in a macro definition?



Answer : D

The correct answer is D.

A search macro is a way to reuse a piece of SPL code in different searches. A search macro can take arguments, which are variables that can be replaced by different values when the macro is called. A search macro can also contain another search macro within it, which is called a nested macro1.

To represent an argument in a macro definition, you need to use the dollar sign ($) character to enclose the argument name. For example, if you want to create a search macro that takes one argument named ''object'', you can use the following syntax:

[my_macro(object)] search sourcetype= object

This will create a search macro named my_macro that takes one argument named object. When you call the macro in a search, you need to provide a value for the object argument, such as:

my_macro(web)

This will replace the object argument with the value web and run the following SPL code:

search sourcetype=web

The other options are not correct because they use quotation marks (' or ') or percentage signs (%) to represent arguments, which are not valid syntax for macro arguments. These characters will be interpreted as literal values instead of variables.


Use search macros in searches

Question 269

What is needed to define a calculated field?



Answer : A

A calculated field in Splunk is created using an eval expression, which allows users to perform calculations or transformations on field values during search time.


Splunk Docs - Calculated fields

Question 270

We can use the rename command to _____ (Select all that apply.)



Answer : D


Question 271

Field aliases are used to __________ data



Answer : D


Question 272
Question 273
Question 274

What other syntax will produce exactly the same results as | chart count over vendor_action by user?



Question 275

The eval command 'if' function requires the following three arguments (in order):



Answer : A

The eval command 'if' function requires the following three arguments (in order): boolean expression, result if true, result if false. The eval command is a search command that allows you to create new fields or modify existing fields by performing calculations or transformations on them. The eval command can use various functions to perform different operations on fields. The 'if' function is one of the functions that can be used with the eval command to perform conditional evaluations on fields. The 'if' function takes three arguments: a boolean expression that evaluates to true or false, a result that will be returned if the boolean expression is true, and a result that will be returned if the boolean expression is false. The 'if' function returns one of the two results based on the evaluation of the boolean expression.


Question 276

Consider the following search: index=web sourcetype=access_combined

The log shows several events that share the same jsessionid value (sd497k117o2f098). View the events as a group.

From the following list, which search groups events by JSESSIONID?



Answer : A

The objective is to group all events that share the same JSESSIONID value and filter them by a specific JSESSIONID.

Option A: This uses the transaction command with the JSESSIONID field to group all events sharing the same session ID and filters for the specific value SD497K117O2F098. This is correct.

Option B: The syntax here is invalid because JSESSIONID <value> is not a proper search syntax.

Option C: The highlight command only highlights fields or values in events; it does not group them.

Option D: While this filters for events containing SD497K117O2F098, it does not group them by JSESSIONID.


Splunk Docs: Transaction Command

Question 277

Which of the following describes this search?

New Search

'third_party_outages(EMEA,-24h)'



Question 278

Consider the following search:

index=web sourcetype=access_combined

The log shows several events that share the same JSESSIONID value (SD470K92802F117). View the events as a group.

From the following list, which search groups events by JSESSIONID?



Answer : B

To group events by JSESSIONID, the correct search is index=web sourcetype=access_combined | transaction JSESSIONID | search SD470K92802F117 (Option B). The transaction command groups events that share the same JSESSIONID value, allowing for the analysis of all events associated with a specific session as a single transaction. The subsequent search for SD470K92802F117 filters these grouped transactions to include only those related to the specified session ID.


Question 279

Which of the following statements are true for this search? (Select all that apply.) SEARCH: sourcetype=access* |fields action productld status



Answer : C


Question 280

Which of the following statements describes POST workflow actions?



Answer : D


Question 281

Which of the following searches will return events containing a tag named Privileged?



Answer : B

The tag=Priv* search will return events containing a tag named Privileged, as well as any other tag that starts with Priv. The asterisk (*) is a wildcard character that matches zero or more characters. The other searches will not match the exact tag name.


Question 282
Question 283
Question 284

A user wants to create a workflow action that will retrieve a specific field value from an event and run a search in a new browser window

in the user's Splunk instance. What kind of workflow action should they create?



Answer : B

A Search workflow action is the appropriate choice when a user wants to retrieve a specific field value from an event and run a search in a new browser window within their Splunk instance (Option B). This type of workflow action allows users to define a search that utilizes field values from selected events as parameters, enabling more detailed investigation or context-specific analysis based on the original search results.


Question 285

When performing a regex field extraction with the Field Extractor (FX), a data type must be chosen before a sample event can be selected. Which of the following data types are supported?



Answer : D

When using the Field Extractor (FX) in Splunk for regex field extraction, it's important to select the context in which you want to perform the extraction. The context is essentially the subset of data you're focusing on for your field extraction task.

D . Sourcetype or source: This is the correct option. In the initial steps of using the Field Extractor tool, you're prompted to choose a data type for your field extraction. The options available are typically based on the nature of your data and how it's organized in Splunk. 'Sourcetype' refers to the kind of data you're dealing with, a categorization that helps Splunk apply specific processing rules. 'Source' refers to the origin of the data, like a specific log file or data input. By selecting either a sourcetype or source, you're narrowing down the dataset on which you'll perform the regex extraction, making it more manageable and relevant.


Question 286
Question 287

Which workflow action method can be used the action type is set to link?



Answer : A

https://docs.splunk.com/Documentation/Splunk/8.0.2/Knowledge/SetupaGETworkflowaction

Define a GET workflow action

Steps

Navigate toSettings > Fields > Workflow Actions.

ClickNewto open up a new workflow action form.

Define aLabelfor the action.

TheLabelfield enables you to define the text that is displayed in either the field or event workflow menu. Labels can be static or include the value of relevant fields.

Determine whether the workflow action applies to specific fields or event types in your data.

UseApply only to the following fieldsto identify one or more fields. When you identify fields, the workflow action only appears for events that have those fields, either in their event menu or field menus. If you leave it blank or enter an asterisk the action appears in menus for all fields.

UseApply only to the following event typesto identify one or more event types. If you identify an event type, the workflow action only appears in the event menus for events that belong to the event type.

ForShow action indetermine whether you want the action to appear in theEvent menu, theFields menus, orBoth.

SetAction typetolink.

InURIprovide a URI for the location of the external resource that you want to send your field values to.

Similar to theLabelsetting, when you declare the value of a field, you use the name of the field enclosed by dollar signs.

Variables passed in GET actions via URIs are automaticallyURL encodedduring transmission. This means you can include values that have spaces between words or punctuation characters.

UnderOpen link in, determine whether the workflow action displays in the current window or if it opens the link in a new window.

Set theLink methodtoget.

ClickSaveto save your workflow action definition.


Question 288
Question 289

What happens to the original field name when a field alias is created?



Answer : A

Creating a field alias in Splunk does not modify or remove the original field. Instead, the alias allows the same data to be accessed using a different field name without affecting the original field.


Question 290

Which of the following searches would return a report of sales by product-name?



Question 291
Question 292
Question 293

When using the timechart command, how can a user group the events into buckets based on time?



Answer : A


Question 294
Question 295

__________ datasets can be added to root dataset to narrow down the search



Answer : D

Child datasets can be added to root datasets to narrow down the search. Datasets are collections of events that represent your data in a structured and hierarchical way. Datasets can be created by using commands such as datamodel or pivot. Datasets can have different types, such as events, search, transaction, etc. Datasets can also have different levels, such as root or child. Root datasets are base datasets that contain all events from a data model or an index. Child datasets are derived datasets that contain a subset of events from a parent dataset based on some constraints, such as search terms, fields, time range, etc. Child datasets can be added to root datasets to narrow down the search and filter out irrelevant events.


Question 296

There are several ways to access the field extractor. Which option automatically identifies data type, source type, and sample event?



Answer : B

There are several ways to access the field extractor. The option that automatically identifies data type, source type, and sample event is Fields sidebar > Extract New Field. The field extractor is a tool that helps you extract fields from your data using delimiters or regular expressions. The field extractor can generate a regex for you based on your selection of sample values or you can enter your own regex in the field extractor. The field extractor can be accessed by using various methods, such as:

Fields sidebar > Extract New Field: This is the easiest way to access the field extractor. The fields sidebar is a panel that shows all available fields for your data and their values. When you click on Extract New Field in the fields sidebar, Splunk will automatically identify the data type, source type, and sample event for your data based on your current search criteria. You can then use the field extractor to select sample values and generate a regex for your new field.

Event Actions > Extract Fields: This is another way to access the field extractor. Event actions are actions that you can perform on individual events in your search results, such as viewing event details, adding to report, adding to dashboard, etc. When you click on Extract Fields in the event actions menu, Splunk will use the current event as the sample event for your data and ask you to select the source type and data type for your data. You can then use the field extractor to select sample values and generate a regex for your new field.

Settings > Field Extractions > New Field Extraction: This is a more advanced way to access the field extractor. Settings is a menu that allows you to configure various aspects of Splunk, such as indexes, inputs, outputs, users, roles, apps, etc. When you click on New Field Extraction in the Settings menu, Splunk will ask you to enter all the details for your new field extraction manually, such as app context, name, source type, data type, sample event, regex, etc. You can then use the field extractor to verify or modify your regex for your new field.


Question 297

Which of the following statements describes Search workflow actions?



Answer : C

Search workflow actions are custom actions that run a search when you click on a field value in your search results. Search workflow actions can be configured with various options, such as label name, search string, time range, app context, etc. One of the options is to define the time range of the search when creating the workflow action. You can choose from predefined time ranges, such as Last 24 hours, Last 7 days, etc., or specify a custom time range using relative or absolute time modifiers. Search workflow actions do not run as real-time searches by default, but rather use the same time range as the original search unless specified otherwise. Search workflow actions cannot be configured as scheduled searches, as they are only triggered by user interaction. Search workflow actions can be configured with any valid search string that includes any search command, such as transaction.


Question 298
Question 299

Using the Field Extractor (FX) tool, a value is highlighted to extract and give a name to a new field. Splunk has not successfully extracted that value from all appropriate events. What steps can be taken so Splunk successfully extracts the value from all appropriate events? (select all that apply)



Answer : A, D

When using the Field Extractor (FX) tool in Splunk and the tool fails to extract a value from all appropriate events, there are specific steps you can take to improve the extraction process. These steps involve interacting with the FX tool and possibly adjusting the extraction method:

A . Select an additional sample event with the Field Extractor (FX) and highlight the missing value in the event. This approach allows Splunk to understand the pattern better by providing more examples. By highlighting the value in another event where it wasn't extracted, you help the FX tool to learn the variability in the data format or structure, improving the accuracy of the field extraction.

D . Edit the regular expression manually. Sometimes the FX tool might not generate the most accurate regular expression for the field extraction, especially when dealing with complex log formats or subtle nuances in the data. In such cases, manually editing the regular expression can significantly improve the extraction process. This involves understanding regular expression syntax and how Splunk extracts fields, allowing for a more tailored approach to field extraction that accounts for variations in the data that the automatic process might miss.

Options B and C are not typically related to improving field extraction within the Field Extractor tool. Re-ingesting data (B) does not directly impact the extraction process, and changing to a delimited extraction method (C) is not always applicable, as it depends on the specific data format and might not resolve the issue of missing values across events.


Question 300

For the following search, which field populates the x-axis?

index=security sourcetype=linux secure | timechart count by action



Question 301

After manually editing; a regular expression (regex), which of the following statements is true?



Answer : B

After manually editing a regular expression (regex) that was created using the Field Extractor (FX) UI, it is no longer possible to edit the field extraction in the FX UI. The FX UI is a tool that helps you extract fields from your data using delimiters or regular expressions. The FX UI can generate a regex for you based on your selection of sample values or you can enter your own regex in the FX UI. However, if you edit the regex manually in the props.conf file, the FX UI will not be able to recognize the changes and will not let you edit the field extraction in the FX UI anymore. You will have to use the props.conf file to make any further changes to the field extraction. Changes made manually cannot be reverted in the FX UI, as the FX UI does not keep track of the changes made in the props.conf file. It is possible to manually edit a regex that was created using the FX UI, as long as you do it in the props.conf file.

Therefore, only statement B is true about manually editing a regex.


Question 302

Clicking a SEGMENT on a chart, ________.



Answer : C


Question 303

Which delimiters can the Field Extractor (FX) detect? (select all that apply)



Answer : B, C, D


The Field Extractor (FX) is a tool that helps you extract fields from your data using delimiters or regular expressions. Delimiters are characters or strings that separate fields in your data. The FX can detect some common delimiters automatically, such as pipes (|), spaces ( ), commas (,), semicolons (;), etc. The FX cannot detect tabs (\t) as delimiters automatically, but you can specify them manually in the FX interface.

Question 304

This is what Splunk uses to categorize the data that is being indexed.



Answer : A


Question 305

Which of the following statements is true about the root dataset of a data model?



Answer : B

In Splunk, a data model's root dataset is the foundational element upon which the rest of the data model is built. The root dataset can be of various types, including search, transaction, or event-based datasets. One of the key features of the root dataset is that it automatically inherits the knowledge objects associated with its base search. These knowledge objects include field extractions, lookups, aliases, and calculated fields that are defined for the base search, ensuring that the root dataset has all necessary contextual information from the outset. This allows users to build upon this dataset with additional child datasets and objects without having to redefine the base search's knowledge objects.


Question 306

Which one of the following statements about the search command is true?



Question 307

The limit attribute will___________.



Answer : A


Question 308
Question 309

Which of the following statements describes POST workflow actions?



Answer : D


Question 310

which of the following commands are used when creating visualizations(select all that apply.)



Answer : A, C, D

The following commands are used when creating visualizations: geom, geostats, and iplocation. Visualizations are graphical representations of data that show trends, patterns, or comparisons. Visualizations can have different types, such as charts, tables, maps, etc. Visualizations can be created by using various commands that transform the data into a suitable format for the visualization type. Some of the commands that are used when creating visualizations are:

geom: This command is used to create choropleth maps that show geographic regions with different colors based on some metric. The geom command takes a KMZ file as an argument that defines the geographic regions and their boundaries. The geom command also takes a field name as an argument that specifies the metric to use for coloring the regions.

geostats: This command is used to create cluster maps that show groups of events with different sizes and colors based on some metric. The geostats command takes a latitude and longitude field as arguments that specify the location of the events. The geostats command also takes a statistical function as an argument that specifies the metric to use for sizing and coloring the clusters.

iplocation: This command is used to create location-based visualizations that show events with different attributes based on their IP addresses. The iplocation command takes an IP address field as an argument and adds some additional fields to the events, such as Country, City, Latitude, Longitude, etc. The iplocation command can be used with other commands such as geom or geostats to create maps based on IP addresses.


Question 311
Question 312

Which of the following statements are true for this search? (Select all that apply.) SEARCH: sourcetype=access* |fields action productld status



Answer : C


Question 313

When using | timchart by host, which filed is representted in the x-axis?



Answer : A


Question 314

A calculated field is a shortcut for performing repetitive, long, or complex transformations using which of the following commands?



Answer : D

The correct answer is D. eval.

A calculated field is a field that is added to events at search time by using an eval expression. A calculated field can use the values of two or more fields that are already present in the events to perform calculations. A calculated field can be defined with Splunk Web or in the props.conf file. They can be used in searches, reports, dashboards, and data models like any other extracted field1.

A calculated field is a shortcut for performing repetitive, long, or complex transformations using the eval command. The eval command is used to create or modify fields by using expressions. The eval command can perform mathematical, string, date and time, comparison, logical, and other operations on fields or values2.

For example, if you want to create a new field named total that is the sum of two fields named price and tax, you can use the eval command as follows:

| eval total=price+tax

However, if you want to use this new field in multiple searches, reports, or dashboards, you can create a calculated field instead of writing the eval command every time. To create a calculated field with Splunk Web, you need to go to Settings > Fields > Calculated Fields and enter the name of the new field (total), the name of the sourcetype (sales), and the eval expression (price+tax). This will create a calculated field named total that will be added to all events with the sourcetype sales at search time. You can then use the total field like any other extracted field without writing the eval expression1.

The other options are not correct because they are not related to calculated fields. These options are:

A) transaction: This command is used to group events that share some common values into a single record, called a transaction. A transaction can span multiple events and multiple sources, and can be useful for correlating events that are related but not contiguous3.

B) lookup: This command is used to enrich events with additional fields from an external source, such as a CSV file or a database. A lookup can add fields to events based on the values of existing fields, such as host, source, sourcetype, or any other extracted field.

C) stats: This command is used to calculate summary statistics on the fields in the search results, such as count, sum, average, etc. It can be used to group and aggregate data by one or more fields.


About calculated fields

eval command overview

transaction command overview

[lookup command overview]

[stats command overview]

Question 315

Which of the following statements describes the command below (select all that apply)

Sourcetype=access_combined | transaction JSESSIONID



Answer : B, C, D

The commandsourcetype=access_combined | transaction JSESSIONIDdoes three things:

It filters the events by the sourcetypeaccess_combined, which is a predefined sourcetype for Apache web server logs.

It groups the events by the fieldJSESSIONID, which is a unique identifier for each user session.

It creates a single event from each group of events that share the sameJSESSIONIDvalue. This single event will have some additional fields created by the transaction command, such asduration,eventcount, andstartime.

Therefore, the statements B, C, and D are true.


Question 316

By default search results are not returned in ________ order.



Answer : A, D


Question 317

A user wants a table that will show the total revenue made for each product in each sales region. Which would be the correct SPL query to use?



Answer : B

The chart command with sum(price) by product, region will return a table where the total revenue (price) is aggregated (sum) for each product and sales region. This is the correct way to aggregate data in Splunk.


Splunk Docs - chart command

Question 318

When using timechart, how many fields can be listed after a by clause?



Question 319

Which of the following knowledge objects can reference field aliases?



Answer : A

Field aliases in Splunk are alternate names assigned to fields. These can be particularly useful for normalizing data from different sources or simply for making field names more intuitive. Once an alias is created for a field, it can be used across various Splunk knowledge objects, enhancing their flexibility and utility.

A . Calculated fields, lookups, event types, and tags: This is the correct answer. Field aliases can indeed be referenced in calculated fields, lookups, event types, and tags within Splunk. When you create an alias for a field, that alias can then be used in these knowledge objects just like any standard field name.

Calculated fields: These are expressions that can create new field values based on existing data. You can use an alias in a calculated field expression to refer to the original field.

Lookups: These are used to enrich your event data by referencing external data sources. If you've created an alias for a field that matches a field in your lookup table, you can use that alias in your lookup configurations.

Event types: These are classifications for events that meet certain search criteria. You can use field aliases in the search criteria for defining an event type.

Tags: These allow you to assign meaningful labels to data, making it easier to search and report on. You can use field aliases in the search criteria that you tag.


Question 320

Which are valid ways to create an event type? (select all that apply)



Answer : C, D

Event types are custom categories of events that are based on search criteria. Event types can be used to label events with meaningful names, such as error, success, login, logout, etc. Event types can also be used to create transactions, alerts, reports, dashboards, etc. Event types can be created in two ways:

By going to the Settings menu and clicking Event Types > New. This will open a form where you can enter the name, description, search string, app context, and tags for the event type.

By selecting an event in search results and clicking Event Actions > Build Event Type. This will open a dialog box where you can enter the name and description for the event type. The search string will be automatically populated based on the selected event.

Event types cannot be created by using the searchtypes command in the search bar, as this command does not exist in Splunk. Event types can also be created by editing the event_type stanza in the transforms.conf file, not the props.conf file.


Question 321

Which of the following statements about data models and pivot are true? (select all that apply)



Answer : D

Data models and pivot are both knowledge objects in Splunk that allow you to analyze and visualize your data in different ways. Data models are collections of datasets that represent your data in a structured and hierarchical way. Data models define how your data is organized into objects and fields. Pivot is a user interface that allows you to create data visualizations that present different aspects of a data model. Pivot does not require users to input SPL searches on data models, but rather lets them select options from menus and forms. Data models are not created out of datasets called pivots, but rather pivots are created from datasets in data models.


Question 322

Consider the following search:

Index=web sourcetype=access_combined

The log shows several events that share the same JSESSIONID value (SD404K289O2F151). View the events as a group. From the following list, which search groups events by JSESSIONID?



Answer : B


Question 323

Which of the following statements describes this search?

sourcetype=access_combined I transaction JSESSIONID | timechart avg (duration)



Question 324

When should you use the transaction command instead of the scats command?



Answer : D

The transaction command is used to group events into transactions based on some common characteristics, such as fields, time, or both. The transaction command can also specify start and end constraints for the transactions, such as a field value that indicates the beginning or the end of a transaction. The stats command is used to calculate summary statistics on the events, such as count, sum, average, etc. The stats command cannot group events based on start and end constraints, but only on fields or time buckets. Therefore, the transaction command should be used instead of the stats command when you need to group events based on start and end constraints.


Question 325

For the following search, which command would further filter for only IP addresses present more than five times?



Answer : A

To filter for only IP addresses that appear more than five times in the search results for index=games, you can use a combination of the stats and where commands. The stats command counts the occurrences of each IP address and assigns the count to IP_count. The where command then filters the results to include only those IP addresses with a count greater than five.

Here is how the complete search would look:

index=games | stats count as IP_count by IP | where IP_count > 5


Splunk Docs: stats command

Splunk Docs: where command

Splunk Answers: Filtering results using stats and where commands

Question 326

Which knowledge Object does the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) use to normalize dat

a. in addition to field aliases, event types, and tags?



Answer : B

Normalize your data for each of these fields using a combination of field aliases, field extractions, and lookups.

https://docs.splunk.com/Documentation/CIM/4.15.0/User/UsetheCIMtonormalizedataatsearchtime


Question 327

A user runs the following search:

index---X sourcetype=Y I chart count (domain) as count, sum (price) as sum by product, action usenull=f useother---f

Which of the following table headers match the order this command creates?



Question 328

Which of the following statements describes POST workflow actions?



Answer : D


Question 329

Which field will be used to populate the field if the productName and product:d fields have values for a given event?



Answer : B

The correct answer is B. The value for the productName field because it appears first.

The coalesce function is an eval function that takes an arbitrary number of arguments and returns the first value that is not null. A null value means that the field has no value at all, while an empty value means that the field has a value, but it is '''' or zero-length1.

The coalesce function can be used to combine fields that have different names but represent the same data, such as IP address or user name. The coalesce function can also be used to rename fields for clarity or convenience2.

The syntax for the coalesce function is:

coalesce(<field1>,<field2>,...)

The coalesce function will return the value of the first field that is not null in the argument list. If all fields are null, the coalesce function will return null.

For example, if you have a set of events where the IP address is extracted to either clientip or ipaddress, you can use the coalesce function to define a new field called ip, that takes the value of either clientip or ipaddress, depending on which is not null:

| eval ip=coalesce(clientip,ipaddress)

In your example, you have a set of events where the product name is extracted to either productName or productid, and you use the coalesce function to define a new field called productINFO, that takes the value of either productName or productid, depending on which is not null:

| eval productINFO=coalesce(productName,productid)

If both productName and productid fields have values for a given event, the coalesce function will return the value of the productName field because it appears first in the argument list. The productid field will be ignored by the coalesce function.

Therefore, the value for the productName field will be used to populate the productINFO field if both fields have values for a given event.


Search Command> Coalesce

USAGE OF SPLUNK EVAL FUNCTION : COALESCE

Question 330

What is the relationship between data models and pivots?



Answer : A

The relationship between data models and pivots is that data models provide the datasets for pivots. Data models are collections of datasets that represent your data in a structured and hierarchical way. Data models define how your data is organized into objects and fields. Pivots are user interfaces that allow you to create data visualizations that present different aspects of a data model. Pivots let you select options from menus and forms to create charts, tables, maps, etc., without writing any SPL code. Pivots use datasets from data models as their source of data. Pivots and data models are not the same thing, as pivots are tools for visualizing data models. Pivots do not provide datasets for data models, but rather use them as inputs.

Therefore, only statement A is true about the relationship between data models and pivots.


Question 331
Question 332
Question 333

Based on the macro definition shown below, what is the correct way to execute the macro in a search string?



Answer : B


The correct way to execute the macro in a search string is to use the formatmacro_name($arg1$, $arg2$, ...)where$arg1$,$arg2$, etc. are the arguments for the macro. In this case, the macro name isconvert_salesand it takes three arguments:currency,symbol, andrate. The arguments are enclosed in dollar signs and separated by commas. Therefore, the correct way to execute the macro isconvert_sales($euro$, $$, .79).

Question 334

What are search macros?



Question 335

When performing a regex field extraction with the Field Extractor (FX), a data type must be chosen before a sample event can be selected. Which of the following data types are supported?



Answer : D

When using the Field Extractor (FX) in Splunk for regex field extraction, it's important to select the context in which you want to perform the extraction. The context is essentially the subset of data you're focusing on for your field extraction task.

D . Sourcetype or source: This is the correct option. In the initial steps of using the Field Extractor tool, you're prompted to choose a data type for your field extraction. The options available are typically based on the nature of your data and how it's organized in Splunk. 'Sourcetype' refers to the kind of data you're dealing with, a categorization that helps Splunk apply specific processing rules. 'Source' refers to the origin of the data, like a specific log file or data input. By selecting either a sourcetype or source, you're narrowing down the dataset on which you'll perform the regex extraction, making it more manageable and relevant.


Question 336
Question 337
Question 338

Which of the following statements about tags is true? (select all that apply.)



Answer : B, D

The following statements about tags are true: tags are based on field/value pairs and tags categorize events based on a search. Tags are custom labels that can be applied to fields or field values to provide additional context or meaning for your data. Tags can be used to filter or analyze your data based on common concepts or themes. Tags can be created by using various methods, such as search commands, configuration files, user interfaces, etc. Some of the characteristics of tags are:

Tags are based on field/value pairs: This means that tags are associated with a specific field name and a specific field value. For example, you can create a tag called ''alert'' for the field name ''status'' and the field value ''critical''. This means that only events that have status=critical will have the ''alert'' tag applied to them.

Tags categorize events based on a search: This means that tags are defined by a search string that matches the events that you want to tag. For example, you can create a tag called ''web'' for the search string sourcetype=access_combined. This means that only events that match the search string sourcetype=access_combined will have the ''web'' tag applied to them.

The following statements about tags are false: tags are case-insensitive and tags are designed to make data more understandable. Tags are case-sensitive and tags are designed to make data more searchable. Tags are case-sensitive: This means that tags must match the exact case of the field name and field value that they are associated with. For example, if you create a tag called ''alert'' for the field name ''status'' and the field value ''critical'', it will not apply to events that have status=CRITICAL or Status=critical. Tags are designed to make data more searchable: This means that tags can help you find relevant events or patterns in your data by using common concepts or themes. For example, if you create a tag called ''web'' for the search string sourcetype=access_combined, you can use tag=web to find all events related to web activity.


Question 339

This is what Splunk uses to categorize the data that is being indexed.



Answer : A


Question 340

In most large Splunk environments, what is the most efficient command that can be used to group events by fields/



Answer : B

https://docs.splunk.com/Documentation/Splunk/8.0.2/Search/Abouttransactions

In other cases, it's usually better to use thestatscommand, which performs more efficiently, especially in a distributed environment. Often there is a unique ID in the events andstatscan be used.


Question 341

Two separate results tables are being combined using the join command. The outer table has the following values:

The inner table has the following values:

The line of SPL used to join the tables is: join employeeNumber type=outer

How many rows are returned in the new table?



Answer : C

In this case, the outer join is applied, which means that all rows from the outer (left) table will be included, even if there are no matching rows in the inner (right) table. The result will include all five rows from the outer table, with the matched data from the inner table where employeeNumber matches. Rows without matching employeeNumber values will have null values for the fields from the inner table.


Splunk Documentation - Join Command

Question 342

When would a user select delimited field extractions using the Field Extractor (FX)?



Answer : A

The correct answer is A. When a log file has values that are separated by the same character, for example, commas.

The Field Extractor (FX) is a utility in Splunk Web that allows you to create new fields from your events by using either regular expressions or delimiters. The FX provides a graphical interface that guides you through the steps of defining and testing your field extractions1.

The FX supports two field extraction methods: regular expression and delimited. The regular expression method works best with unstructured event data, such as logs or messages, that do not have a consistent format or structure. You select a sample event and highlight one or more fields to extract from that event, and the FX generates a regular expression that matches similar events in your data set and extracts the fields from them1.

The delimited method is designed for structured event data: data from files with headers, where all of the fields in the events are separated by a common delimiter, such as a comma, a tab, or a space. You select a sample event, identify the delimiter, and then rename the fields that the FX finds1.

Therefore, you would select the delimited field extraction method when you have a log file that has values that are separated by the same character, for example, commas. This method will allow you to easily extract the fields based on the delimiter without writing complex regular expressions.

The other options are not correct because they are not suitable for the delimited field extraction method. These options are:

B) When a log file contains empty lines or comments: This option does not indicate that the log file has a structured format or a common delimiter. The delimited method might not work well with this type of data, as it might miss some fields or include some unwanted values.

C) With structured files such as JSON or XML: This option does not require the delimited method, as Splunk can automatically extract fields from JSON or XML files by using indexed extractions or search-time extractions2. The delimited method might not work well with this type of data, as it might not recognize the nested structure or the special characters.

D) When the file has a header that might provide information about its structure or format: This option does not indicate that the file has a common delimiter between the fields. The delimited method might not work well with this type of data, as it might not be able to identify the fields based on the header information.


Build field extractions with the field extractor

Configure indexed field extraction

Question 343

What do events in a transaction have In common?



Answer : D


A transaction is a group of events that share some common characteristics, such as fields, time, or both. A transaction can be created by using the transaction command or by defining an event type with transactiontype=true in props.conf. Events in a transaction have one or more fields in common that relate them to each other. For example, you can create a transaction based on JSESSIONID, which is a unique identifier for each user session in web logs. Events in a transaction do not have to have the same timestamp, sourcetype, or exact same set of fields. They only have to share one or more fields that define the transaction.

Question 344

Which type of workflow action sends field values to an external resource (e.g. a ticketing system)?



Answer : A

The type of workflow action that sends field values to an external resource (e.g. a ticketing system) is POST. A POST workflow action allows you to send a POST request to a URI location with field values or static values as arguments. For example, you can use a POST workflow action to create a ticket in an external system with information from an event.


Question 345

Based on the macro definition shown below, what is the correct way to execute the macro in a search string?



Answer : B


The correct way to execute the macro in a search string is to use the formatmacro_name($arg1$, $arg2$, ...)where$arg1$,$arg2$, etc. are the arguments for the macro. In this case, the macro name isconvert_salesand it takes three arguments:currency,symbol, andrate. The arguments are enclosed in dollar signs and separated by commas. Therefore, the correct way to execute the macro isconvert_sales($euro$, $$, .79).

Question 346

Which command can include both an over and a by clause to divide results into sub-groupings?



Answer : A


Question 347

Which of the following commands support the same set of functions?



Answer : C


Question 348

Clicking a SEGMENT on a chart, ________.



Answer : C


Question 349
Question 350
Question 351

What other syntax will produce exactly the same results as | chart count over vendor_action by user?



Question 352

Consider the the following search run over a time range of last 7 days:

index=web sourcetype=access_conbined | timechart avg(bytes) by product_nane

Which option is used to change the default time span so that results are grouped into 12 hour intervals?



Question 353

Which type of visualization shows relationships between discrete values in three dimensions?



Question 354
Question 355

What fields does the transaction command add to the raw events? (select all that apply)



Question 356
Question 357

What happens when a user edits the regular expression (regex) field extraction generated in the Field Extractor (FX)?



Answer : A


Question 358
Question 359

How do event types help a user search their data?



Answer : D

Event types allow users to assign labels to events based on predefined search strings. This helps categorize data and makes it easier to reference specific sets of events in future searches.


Splunk Docs - Event types

Question 360

Which of the following is one of the pre-configured data models included in the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) add-on?



Answer : D


Question 361

Which of the following statements describes calculated fields?



Answer : B


Question 362
Question 363

What does the fillnull command do in this search?

index=main sourcetype=http_log | fillnull value="Unknown" src



Answer : C

The fillnull command in Splunk is used to replace null (missing) field values with a specified value.

Explanation of options:

A: Incorrect, as fillnull does not set fields to null; it fills null values with a specific value.

B: Incorrect, as the command only affects the specified field (src in this case).

C: Correct, as the fillnull command explicitly sets null values in the src field to 'Unknown'.

D: Incorrect, as only the src field is affected, not all fields.

Example:

If the src field is null for some events, fillnull will populate 'Unknown' in those cases.


Question 364

What does the transaction command do?



Answer : B

The transaction command is a search command that creates a single event from a group of events that share some common characteristics. The transaction command can group events based on fields, time, or both. The transaction command can also create some additional fields for each transaction, such asduration,eventcount,startime, etc. The transaction command does not group a set of transactions based on time, but rather groups a set of events into a transaction based on time. The transaction command does not separate two events based on one or more values, but rather joins multiple events based on one or more values. The transaction command does not return the number of credit card transactions found in the event logs, but rather creates transactions from the events that match the search criteria.


Question 365

What will you learn from the results of the following search?

sourcetype=cisco_esa | transaction mid, dcid, icid | timechart avg(duration)



Answer : A


Question 366

What is a limitation of searches generated by workflow actions?



Answer : D


Question 367

Consider the following search: index=web sourcetype=access_combined

The log shows several events that share the same jsessionid value (sd497k117o2f098). View the events as a group.

From the following list, which search groups events by JSESSIONID?



Answer : A

The objective is to group all events that share the same JSESSIONID value and filter them by a specific JSESSIONID.

Option A: This uses the transaction command with the JSESSIONID field to group all events sharing the same session ID and filters for the specific value SD497K117O2F098. This is correct.

Option B: The syntax here is invalid because JSESSIONID <value> is not a proper search syntax.

Option C: The highlight command only highlights fields or values in events; it does not group them.

Option D: While this filters for events containing SD497K117O2F098, it does not group them by JSESSIONID.


Splunk Docs: Transaction Command

Question 368
Question 369

There are several ways to access the field extractor. Which option automatically identifies data type, source type, and sample event?



Answer : B

There are several ways to access the field extractor. The option that automatically identifies data type, source type, and sample event is Fields sidebar > Extract New Field. The field extractor is a tool that helps you extract fields from your data using delimiters or regular expressions. The field extractor can generate a regex for you based on your selection of sample values or you can enter your own regex in the field extractor. The field extractor can be accessed by using various methods, such as:

Fields sidebar > Extract New Field: This is the easiest way to access the field extractor. The fields sidebar is a panel that shows all available fields for your data and their values. When you click on Extract New Field in the fields sidebar, Splunk will automatically identify the data type, source type, and sample event for your data based on your current search criteria. You can then use the field extractor to select sample values and generate a regex for your new field.

Event Actions > Extract Fields: This is another way to access the field extractor. Event actions are actions that you can perform on individual events in your search results, such as viewing event details, adding to report, adding to dashboard, etc. When you click on Extract Fields in the event actions menu, Splunk will use the current event as the sample event for your data and ask you to select the source type and data type for your data. You can then use the field extractor to select sample values and generate a regex for your new field.

Settings > Field Extractions > New Field Extraction: This is a more advanced way to access the field extractor. Settings is a menu that allows you to configure various aspects of Splunk, such as indexes, inputs, outputs, users, roles, apps, etc. When you click on New Field Extraction in the Settings menu, Splunk will ask you to enter all the details for your new field extraction manually, such as app context, name, source type, data type, sample event, regex, etc. You can then use the field extractor to verify or modify your regex for your new field.


Question 370

Which of the following statements about tags is true? (select all that apply.)



Answer : B, D

The following statements about tags are true: tags are based on field/value pairs and tags categorize events based on a search. Tags are custom labels that can be applied to fields or field values to provide additional context or meaning for your data. Tags can be used to filter or analyze your data based on common concepts or themes. Tags can be created by using various methods, such as search commands, configuration files, user interfaces, etc. Some of the characteristics of tags are:

Tags are based on field/value pairs: This means that tags are associated with a specific field name and a specific field value. For example, you can create a tag called ''alert'' for the field name ''status'' and the field value ''critical''. This means that only events that have status=critical will have the ''alert'' tag applied to them.

Tags categorize events based on a search: This means that tags are defined by a search string that matches the events that you want to tag. For example, you can create a tag called ''web'' for the search string sourcetype=access_combined. This means that only events that match the search string sourcetype=access_combined will have the ''web'' tag applied to them.

The following statements about tags are false: tags are case-insensitive and tags are designed to make data more understandable. Tags are case-sensitive and tags are designed to make data more searchable. Tags are case-sensitive: This means that tags must match the exact case of the field name and field value that they are associated with. For example, if you create a tag called ''alert'' for the field name ''status'' and the field value ''critical'', it will not apply to events that have status=CRITICAL or Status=critical. Tags are designed to make data more searchable: This means that tags can help you find relevant events or patterns in your data by using common concepts or themes. For example, if you create a tag called ''web'' for the search string sourcetype=access_combined, you can use tag=web to find all events related to web activity.


Question 371
Question 372

How are arguments defined within the macro search string?



Answer : A

Arguments are defined within the macro search string by using dollar signs on either side of the argument name, such as arg1 or fragment.

Reference

Search macro examples

Define search macros in Settings

Use search macros in searches


Question 373
Question 374

What other syntax will produce exactly the same results as | chart count over vendor_action by user?



Question 375

How is a variable for a macro defined?



Answer : C

In Splunk, a variable for a macro is defined by placing the variable name inside dollar signs, like this: $variable name$. This syntax allows the macro to dynamically replace the variable with the appropriate value when the macro is invoked within a search. Using this method ensures that the search strings can be dynamically adjusted based on the variable's value at runtime.


Splunk Docs: Use macros

Splunk Answers: Defining and Using Macros

Question 376

Which of the following statements describes POST workflow actions?



Answer : D


Question 377

A calculated field is a shortcut for performing repetitive, long, or complex transformations using which of the following commands?



Answer : D

The correct answer is D. eval.

A calculated field is a field that is added to events at search time by using an eval expression. A calculated field can use the values of two or more fields that are already present in the events to perform calculations. A calculated field can be defined with Splunk Web or in the props.conf file. They can be used in searches, reports, dashboards, and data models like any other extracted field1.

A calculated field is a shortcut for performing repetitive, long, or complex transformations using the eval command. The eval command is used to create or modify fields by using expressions. The eval command can perform mathematical, string, date and time, comparison, logical, and other operations on fields or values2.

For example, if you want to create a new field named total that is the sum of two fields named price and tax, you can use the eval command as follows:

| eval total=price+tax

However, if you want to use this new field in multiple searches, reports, or dashboards, you can create a calculated field instead of writing the eval command every time. To create a calculated field with Splunk Web, you need to go to Settings > Fields > Calculated Fields and enter the name of the new field (total), the name of the sourcetype (sales), and the eval expression (price+tax). This will create a calculated field named total that will be added to all events with the sourcetype sales at search time. You can then use the total field like any other extracted field without writing the eval expression1.

The other options are not correct because they are not related to calculated fields. These options are:

A) transaction: This command is used to group events that share some common values into a single record, called a transaction. A transaction can span multiple events and multiple sources, and can be useful for correlating events that are related but not contiguous3.

B) lookup: This command is used to enrich events with additional fields from an external source, such as a CSV file or a database. A lookup can add fields to events based on the values of existing fields, such as host, source, sourcetype, or any other extracted field.

C) stats: This command is used to calculate summary statistics on the fields in the search results, such as count, sum, average, etc. It can be used to group and aggregate data by one or more fields.


About calculated fields

eval command overview

transaction command overview

[lookup command overview]

[stats command overview]

Question 378
Question 379
Question 380

These kinds of charts represent a series in a single bar with multiple sections



Answer : D

Stacked charts represent a series in a single bar with multiple sections. A chart is a graphical representation of data that shows trends, patterns, or comparisons. A chart can have different types, such as column, bar, line, area, pie, etc. A chart can also have different modes, such as split-series, multi-series, stacked, etc. A stacked chart is a type of chart that shows multiple series in a single bar or area with different sections for each series


Question 381

Which of the following Statements about macros is true? (select all that apply)



Question 382

which of the following commands are used when creating visualizations(select all that apply.)



Answer : A, C, D

The following commands are used when creating visualizations: geom, geostats, and iplocation. Visualizations are graphical representations of data that show trends, patterns, or comparisons. Visualizations can have different types, such as charts, tables, maps, etc. Visualizations can be created by using various commands that transform the data into a suitable format for the visualization type. Some of the commands that are used when creating visualizations are:

geom: This command is used to create choropleth maps that show geographic regions with different colors based on some metric. The geom command takes a KMZ file as an argument that defines the geographic regions and their boundaries. The geom command also takes a field name as an argument that specifies the metric to use for coloring the regions.

geostats: This command is used to create cluster maps that show groups of events with different sizes and colors based on some metric. The geostats command takes a latitude and longitude field as arguments that specify the location of the events. The geostats command also takes a statistical function as an argument that specifies the metric to use for sizing and coloring the clusters.

iplocation: This command is used to create location-based visualizations that show events with different attributes based on their IP addresses. The iplocation command takes an IP address field as an argument and adds some additional fields to the events, such as Country, City, Latitude, Longitude, etc. The iplocation command can be used with other commands such as geom or geostats to create maps based on IP addresses.


Question 383

Given the following eval statement:

... | eval field1 = if(isnotnull(field1),field1,0), field2 = if(isnull(field2), "NO-VALUE", field2)

Which of the following is the equivalent using fillnull?



Answer : D

The fillnull command can be used to replace null values in specific fields. The correct equivalent expression for the given eval statement would involve using fillnull twice, once for field1 to replace null values with 0, and once for field2 to replace null values with 'NO-VALUE'.


Splunk Docs - fillnull command

Question 384

When a search returns __________, you can view the results as a list.



Answer : C


Question 385

Which of the following statements about tags is true? (select all that apply.)



Answer : B, D

The following statements about tags are true: tags are based on field/value pairs and tags categorize events based on a search. Tags are custom labels that can be applied to fields or field values to provide additional context or meaning for your data. Tags can be used to filter or analyze your data based on common concepts or themes. Tags can be created by using various methods, such as search commands, configuration files, user interfaces, etc. Some of the characteristics of tags are:

Tags are based on field/value pairs: This means that tags are associated with a specific field name and a specific field value. For example, you can create a tag called ''alert'' for the field name ''status'' and the field value ''critical''. This means that only events that have status=critical will have the ''alert'' tag applied to them.

Tags categorize events based on a search: This means that tags are defined by a search string that matches the events that you want to tag. For example, you can create a tag called ''web'' for the search string sourcetype=access_combined. This means that only events that match the search string sourcetype=access_combined will have the ''web'' tag applied to them.

The following statements about tags are false: tags are case-insensitive and tags are designed to make data more understandable. Tags are case-sensitive and tags are designed to make data more searchable. Tags are case-sensitive: This means that tags must match the exact case of the field name and field value that they are associated with. For example, if you create a tag called ''alert'' for the field name ''status'' and the field value ''critical'', it will not apply to events that have status=CRITICAL or Status=critical. Tags are designed to make data more searchable: This means that tags can help you find relevant events or patterns in your data by using common concepts or themes. For example, if you create a tag called ''web'' for the search string sourcetype=access_combined, you can use tag=web to find all events related to web activity.


Question 386

which of the following are valid options with the chart command



Answer : A, B


Question 387

After manually editing; a regular expression (regex), which of the following statements is true?



Answer : B

After manually editing a regular expression (regex) that was created using the Field Extractor (FX) UI, it is no longer possible to edit the field extraction in the FX UI. The FX UI is a tool that helps you extract fields from your data using delimiters or regular expressions. The FX UI can generate a regex for you based on your selection of sample values or you can enter your own regex in the FX UI. However, if you edit the regex manually in the props.conf file, the FX UI will not be able to recognize the changes and will not let you edit the field extraction in the FX UI anymore. You will have to use the props.conf file to make any further changes to the field extraction. Changes made manually cannot be reverted in the FX UI, as the FX UI does not keep track of the changes made in the props.conf file. It is possible to manually edit a regex that was created using the FX UI, as long as you do it in the props.conf file.

Therefore, only statement B is true about manually editing a regex.


Question 388

Which are valid ways to create an event type? (select all that apply)



Answer : C, D

Event types are custom categories of events that are based on search criteria. Event types can be used to label events with meaningful names, such as error, success, login, logout, etc. Event types can also be used to create transactions, alerts, reports, dashboards, etc. Event types can be created in two ways:

By going to the Settings menu and clicking Event Types > New. This will open a form where you can enter the name, description, search string, app context, and tags for the event type.

By selecting an event in search results and clicking Event Actions > Build Event Type. This will open a dialog box where you can enter the name and description for the event type. The search string will be automatically populated based on the selected event.

Event types cannot be created by using the searchtypes command in the search bar, as this command does not exist in Splunk. Event types can also be created by editing the event_type stanza in the transforms.conf file, not the props.conf file.


Question 389

How can an existing accelerated data model be edited?



Answer : C

An existing accelerated data model can be edited, but the data model must be de-accelerated before any structural edits can be made (Option C). This is because the acceleration process involves pre-computing and storing data, and changes to the data model's structure could invalidate or conflict with the pre-computed data. Once the data model is de-accelerated and edits are completed, it can be re-accelerated to optimize performance.


Question 390
Question 391

How is a variable for a macro defined?



Answer : C

In Splunk, a variable for a macro is defined by placing the variable name inside dollar signs, like this: $variable name$. This syntax allows the macro to dynamically replace the variable with the appropriate value when the macro is invoked within a search. Using this method ensures that the search strings can be dynamically adjusted based on the variable's value at runtime.


Splunk Docs: Use macros

Splunk Answers: Defining and Using Macros

Question 392
Question 393

What is a benefit of installing the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) add-on?



Answer : B

It provides users with a standardized set of field names and tags to normalize data.

The Splunk CIM add-on provides a standardized set of field names and data models, which allows users to normalize and categorize data from various sources into a common format. This helps with data interoperability and enables faster, more consistent reporting and searching across different data sources.


Splunk Documentation - Common Information Model (CIM)

Question 394
Question 395

It is mandatory for the lookup file to have this for an automatic lookup to work.



Answer : D


Question 396

Which type of visualization shows relationships between discrete values in three dimensions?



Question 397
Question 398

Which of the following statements describes macros?



Answer : C


A macro is a reusable search string that can contain any part of a search, such as search terms, commands, arguments, etc. A macro can have a flexible time range that can be specified when the macro is executed. A macro can also have arguments that can be passed to the macro when it is executed. A macro can be created by using the Settings menu or by editing the macros.conf file. A macro does not have to contain the full search, but only the part that needs to be reused. A macro does not have to have a fixed time range, but can use a relative or absolute time range modifier. A macro does not have to contain only a portion of the search, but can contain multiple parts of the search.

Question 399
Question 400

How do event types help a user search their data?



Answer : D

Event types allow users to assign labels to events based on predefined search strings. This helps categorize data and makes it easier to reference specific sets of events in future searches.


Splunk Docs - Event types

Question 401

Which of the following statements about calculated fields in Splunk is true?



Answer : B

The correct answer is B. Calculated fields can be chained together to create more complex fields.

Calculated fields are fields that are added to events at search time by using eval expressions. They can be used to perform calculations with the values of two or more fields already present in those events. Calculated fields can be defined with Splunk Web or in the props.conf file. They can be used in searches, reports, dashboards, and data models like any other extracted field1.

Calculated fields can also be chained together to create more complex fields. This means that you can use a calculated field as an input for another calculated field. For example, if you have a calculated field named total that sums up the values of two fields named price and tax, you can use the total field to create another calculated field named discount that applies a percentage discount to the total field. To do this, you need to define the discount field with an eval expression that references the total field, such as:

discount = total * 0.9

This will create a new field named discount that is equal to 90% of the total field value for each event2.


About calculated fields

Chaining calculated fields

Question 402

which of the following commands are used when creating visualizations(select all that apply.)



Answer : A, C, D

The following commands are used when creating visualizations: geom, geostats, and iplocation. Visualizations are graphical representations of data that show trends, patterns, or comparisons. Visualizations can have different types, such as charts, tables, maps, etc. Visualizations can be created by using various commands that transform the data into a suitable format for the visualization type. Some of the commands that are used when creating visualizations are:

geom: This command is used to create choropleth maps that show geographic regions with different colors based on some metric. The geom command takes a KMZ file as an argument that defines the geographic regions and their boundaries. The geom command also takes a field name as an argument that specifies the metric to use for coloring the regions.

geostats: This command is used to create cluster maps that show groups of events with different sizes and colors based on some metric. The geostats command takes a latitude and longitude field as arguments that specify the location of the events. The geostats command also takes a statistical function as an argument that specifies the metric to use for sizing and coloring the clusters.

iplocation: This command is used to create location-based visualizations that show events with different attributes based on their IP addresses. The iplocation command takes an IP address field as an argument and adds some additional fields to the events, such as Country, City, Latitude, Longitude, etc. The iplocation command can be used with other commands such as geom or geostats to create maps based on IP addresses.


Question 403

Which of the following statements are true for this search? (Select all that apply.) SEARCH: sourcetype=access* |fields action productld status



Answer : C


Question 404

Where are the descriptions of the data models that come with the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) Add-on documented?



Answer : B

The descriptions of the data models that come with the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) Add-on are documented in the CIM Add-on manual (Option B). This manual provides detailed information about the data models, including their structure, the types of data they are designed to normalize, and how they can be used to facilitate cross-sourcing reporting and analysis.


Question 405

These kinds of charts represent a series in a single bar with multiple sections



Answer : D

Stacked charts represent a series in a single bar with multiple sections. A chart is a graphical representation of data that shows trends, patterns, or comparisons. A chart can have different types, such as column, bar, line, area, pie, etc. A chart can also have different modes, such as split-series, multi-series, stacked, etc. A stacked chart is a type of chart that shows multiple series in a single bar or area with different sections for each series


Question 406

What does the fillnull command replace null values with, if the value argument is not specified?



Answer : A

The fillnull command replaces null values with 0 by default, if the value argument is not specified. You can use the value argument to specify a different value to replace null values with, such as N/A or NULL.


Question 407

Which workflow action method can be used the action type is set to link?



Answer : A

https://docs.splunk.com/Documentation/Splunk/8.0.2/Knowledge/SetupaGETworkflowaction

Define a GET workflow action

Steps

Navigate toSettings > Fields > Workflow Actions.

ClickNewto open up a new workflow action form.

Define aLabelfor the action.

TheLabelfield enables you to define the text that is displayed in either the field or event workflow menu. Labels can be static or include the value of relevant fields.

Determine whether the workflow action applies to specific fields or event types in your data.

UseApply only to the following fieldsto identify one or more fields. When you identify fields, the workflow action only appears for events that have those fields, either in their event menu or field menus. If you leave it blank or enter an asterisk the action appears in menus for all fields.

UseApply only to the following event typesto identify one or more event types. If you identify an event type, the workflow action only appears in the event menus for events that belong to the event type.

ForShow action indetermine whether you want the action to appear in theEvent menu, theFields menus, orBoth.

SetAction typetolink.

InURIprovide a URI for the location of the external resource that you want to send your field values to.

Similar to theLabelsetting, when you declare the value of a field, you use the name of the field enclosed by dollar signs.

Variables passed in GET actions via URIs are automaticallyURL encodedduring transmission. This means you can include values that have spaces between words or punctuation characters.

UnderOpen link in, determine whether the workflow action displays in the current window or if it opens the link in a new window.

Set theLink methodtoget.

ClickSaveto save your workflow action definition.


Question 408

Field aliases are used to __________ data



Answer : D


Question 409

When using | timechart by host, which field is represented in the x-axis?



Answer : D


Question 410

When a search returns __________, you can view the results as a list.



Answer : C


Question 411
Question 412

When would transaction be used instead of stats?



Answer : D

The transaction command is used to group events that are related by some common fields or conditions, such as start/end values, time span, or pauses. The stats command is used to calculate statistics on a group of events by a common field value.

Reference

Splunk Community

Splunk Transaction - Exact Details You Need


Question 413
Question 414
Question 415

which of the following commands are used when creating visualizations(select all that apply.)



Answer : A, C, D

The following commands are used when creating visualizations: geom, geostats, and iplocation. Visualizations are graphical representations of data that show trends, patterns, or comparisons. Visualizations can have different types, such as charts, tables, maps, etc. Visualizations can be created by using various commands that transform the data into a suitable format for the visualization type. Some of the commands that are used when creating visualizations are:

geom: This command is used to create choropleth maps that show geographic regions with different colors based on some metric. The geom command takes a KMZ file as an argument that defines the geographic regions and their boundaries. The geom command also takes a field name as an argument that specifies the metric to use for coloring the regions.

geostats: This command is used to create cluster maps that show groups of events with different sizes and colors based on some metric. The geostats command takes a latitude and longitude field as arguments that specify the location of the events. The geostats command also takes a statistical function as an argument that specifies the metric to use for sizing and coloring the clusters.

iplocation: This command is used to create location-based visualizations that show events with different attributes based on their IP addresses. The iplocation command takes an IP address field as an argument and adds some additional fields to the events, such as Country, City, Latitude, Longitude, etc. The iplocation command can be used with other commands such as geom or geostats to create maps based on IP addresses.


Question 416

Which of the following statements describes field aliases?



Answer : B

Field aliases are alternative names for fields in Splunk. Field aliases can be used to normalize data across different sources and sourcetypes that have different field names for the same concept. For example, you can create a field alias for src_ip that maps to clientip, source_address, or any other field name that represents the source IP address in different sourcetypes. Field aliases can also be used in lookup file definitions to map fields in your data to fields in the lookup file. For example, you can use a field alias for src_ip to map it to ip_address in a lookup file that contains geolocation information for IP addresses. Field alias names do not replace the original field name, but rather create a copy of the field with a different name. Field alias names are case sensitive when used as part of a search, meaning that src_ip and SRC_IP are different fields.


Question 417

How are arguments defined within the macro search string?



Answer : A

Arguments are defined within the macro search string by using dollar signs on either side of the argument name, such as arg1 or fragment.

Reference

Search macro examples

Define search macros in Settings

Use search macros in searches


Question 418
Question 419
Question 420

Use the dedup command to _____.



Answer : B


Question 421

Which of the following statements is true, especially in large environments?



Answer : B


The stats command is faster and more efficient than the transaction command, especially in large environments. The stats command is used to calculate summary statistics on the events, such as count, sum, average, etc. The stats command can group events by one or more fields or by time buckets. The stats command does not create new events from groups of events, but rather creates new fields with statistical values. The transaction command is used to group events into transactions based on some common characteristics, such as fields, time, or both. The transaction command creates new events from groups of events that share one or more fields. The transaction command also creates some additional fields for each transaction, such as duration, eventcount, startime, etc. The transaction command is slower and more resource-intensive than the stats command because it has to process more data and create more events and fields.

Question 422

When is a GET workflow action needed?



Answer : B


Question 423

A user wants a table that will show the total revenue made for each product in each sales region. Which would be the correct SPL query to use?



Answer : B

The chart command with sum(price) by product, region will return a table where the total revenue (price) is aggregated (sum) for each product and sales region. This is the correct way to aggregate data in Splunk.


Splunk Docs - chart command

Question 424

Which of the following statements describe the Common Information Model (CIM)? (select all that apply)



Question 425
Question 426

When using the timechart command, how can a user group the events into buckets based on time?



Answer : A


Question 427

This is what Splunk uses to categorize the data that is being indexed.



Answer : A


Question 428
Question 429

When should the regular expression mode of Field Extractor (FX) be used? (select all that apply)



Question 430
Question 431

Which of the following searches will return events containing a tag named Privileged?



Answer : B

The tag=Priv* search will return events containing a tag named Privileged, as well as any other tag that starts with Priv. The asterisk (*) is a wildcard character that matches zero or more characters. The other searches will not match the exact tag name.


Question 432

When using | timchart by host, which filed is representted in the x-axis?



Answer : A


Question 433

Data model fields can be added using the Auto-Extracted method. Which of the following statements describe Auto-Extracted fields? (select all that apply)



Question 434

Which of the following is true about a datamodel that has been accelerated?



Answer : A

A data model that has been accelerated can be used with Pivot, the | tstats command, or the | datamodel command (Option A). Acceleration pre-computes and stores results for quicker access, enhancing the performance of searches and analyses that utilize the data model, especially for large datasets. This makes accelerated data models highly efficient for use in various analytical tools and commands within Splunk.


Question 435

A calculated field is a shortcut for performing repetitive, long, or complex transformations using which of the following commands?



Answer : D

The correct answer is D. eval.

A calculated field is a field that is added to events at search time by using an eval expression. A calculated field can use the values of two or more fields that are already present in the events to perform calculations. A calculated field can be defined with Splunk Web or in the props.conf file. They can be used in searches, reports, dashboards, and data models like any other extracted field1.

A calculated field is a shortcut for performing repetitive, long, or complex transformations using the eval command. The eval command is used to create or modify fields by using expressions. The eval command can perform mathematical, string, date and time, comparison, logical, and other operations on fields or values2.

For example, if you want to create a new field named total that is the sum of two fields named price and tax, you can use the eval command as follows:

| eval total=price+tax

However, if you want to use this new field in multiple searches, reports, or dashboards, you can create a calculated field instead of writing the eval command every time. To create a calculated field with Splunk Web, you need to go to Settings > Fields > Calculated Fields and enter the name of the new field (total), the name of the sourcetype (sales), and the eval expression (price+tax). This will create a calculated field named total that will be added to all events with the sourcetype sales at search time. You can then use the total field like any other extracted field without writing the eval expression1.

The other options are not correct because they are not related to calculated fields. These options are:

A) transaction: This command is used to group events that share some common values into a single record, called a transaction. A transaction can span multiple events and multiple sources, and can be useful for correlating events that are related but not contiguous3.

B) lookup: This command is used to enrich events with additional fields from an external source, such as a CSV file or a database. A lookup can add fields to events based on the values of existing fields, such as host, source, sourcetype, or any other extracted field.

C) stats: This command is used to calculate summary statistics on the fields in the search results, such as count, sum, average, etc. It can be used to group and aggregate data by one or more fields.


About calculated fields

eval command overview

transaction command overview

[lookup command overview]

[stats command overview]

Question 436

Two separate results tables are being combined using the join command. The outer table has the following values:

The inner table has the following values:

The line of SPL used to join the tables is: join employeeNumber type=outer

How many rows are returned in the new table?



Answer : C

In this case, the outer join is applied, which means that all rows from the outer (left) table will be included, even if there are no matching rows in the inner (right) table. The result will include all five rows from the outer table, with the matched data from the inner table where employeeNumber matches. Rows without matching employeeNumber values will have null values for the fields from the inner table.


Splunk Documentation - Join Command

Question 437

Consider the following search:

Index=web sourcetype=access_combined

The log shows several events that share the same JSESSIONID value (SD404K289O2F151). View the events as a group. From the following list, which search groups events by JSESSIONID?



Answer : B


Question 438

When multiple event types with different color values are assigned to the same event, what determines the color displayed for the events?



Answer : C


When multiple event types with different color values are assigned to the same event, the color displayed for the events is determined by the priority of the event types. The priority is a numerical value that indicates how important an event type is. The higher the priority, the more important the event type. The event type with the highest priority will determine the color of the event.

Question 439

What is the correct syntax to find events associated with a tag?



Answer : D

The correct syntax to find events associated with a tag in Splunk is tag=<value>1. So, the correct answer is D) tag=<value>. This syntax allows you to annotate specified fields in your search results with tags1.

In Splunk, tags are a type of knowledge object that you can use to add meaningful aliases to field values in your data1. For example, if you have a field called status_code in your data, you might have different status codes like 200, 404, 500, etc. You can create tags for these status codes like success for 200, not_found for 404, and server_error for 500. Then, you can use the tag command in your searches to find events associated with these tags1.

Here is an example of how you can use the tag command in a search:

index=main sourcetype=access_combined | tag status_code

In this search, the tag command annotates the status_code field in the search results with the corresponding tags. If you have tagged the status code 200 with success, the status code 404 with not_found, and the status code 500 with server_error, the search results will include these tags1.

You can also use the tag command with a specific tag value to find events associated with that tag. For example, the following search finds all events where the status code is tagged with success:

index=main sourcetype=access_combined | tag status_code | search tag::status_code=success

In this search, the tag command annotates the status_code field with the corresponding tags, and the search command filters the results to include only events where the status_code field is tagged with success1.


Question 440
Question 441

Which delimiters can the Field Extractor (FX) detect? (select all that apply)



Answer : B, C, D


The Field Extractor (FX) is a tool that helps you extract fields from your data using delimiters or regular expressions. Delimiters are characters or strings that separate fields in your data. The FX can detect some common delimiters automatically, such as pipes (|), spaces ( ), commas (,), semicolons (;), etc. The FX cannot detect tabs (\t) as delimiters automatically, but you can specify them manually in the FX interface.

Question 442

For the following search, which field populates the x-axis?

index=security sourcetype=linux secure | timechart count by action



Question 443

Consider the following search:

index=web sourcetype=access_corabined

The log shows several events that share the same jsesszonid value (SD462K101O2F267). View the events as a group.

From the following list, which search groups events by jSSESSIONID?



Question 444
Question 445

Which of the following statements about tags is true? (select all that apply.)



Answer : B, D

The following statements about tags are true: tags are based on field/value pairs and tags categorize events based on a search. Tags are custom labels that can be applied to fields or field values to provide additional context or meaning for your data. Tags can be used to filter or analyze your data based on common concepts or themes. Tags can be created by using various methods, such as search commands, configuration files, user interfaces, etc. Some of the characteristics of tags are:

Tags are based on field/value pairs: This means that tags are associated with a specific field name and a specific field value. For example, you can create a tag called ''alert'' for the field name ''status'' and the field value ''critical''. This means that only events that have status=critical will have the ''alert'' tag applied to them.

Tags categorize events based on a search: This means that tags are defined by a search string that matches the events that you want to tag. For example, you can create a tag called ''web'' for the search string sourcetype=access_combined. This means that only events that match the search string sourcetype=access_combined will have the ''web'' tag applied to them.

The following statements about tags are false: tags are case-insensitive and tags are designed to make data more understandable. Tags are case-sensitive and tags are designed to make data more searchable. Tags are case-sensitive: This means that tags must match the exact case of the field name and field value that they are associated with. For example, if you create a tag called ''alert'' for the field name ''status'' and the field value ''critical'', it will not apply to events that have status=CRITICAL or Status=critical. Tags are designed to make data more searchable: This means that tags can help you find relevant events or patterns in your data by using common concepts or themes. For example, if you create a tag called ''web'' for the search string sourcetype=access_combined, you can use tag=web to find all events related to web activity.


Question 446

A user wants to create a new field alias for a field that appears in two sourcetypes.

How many field aliases need to be created?



Answer : B


Question 447

What does the following search do?



Answer : B

The search string below creates a table of the total count of mysterymeat corndogs split by user.

| stats count by user | where corndog=mysterymeat

The search string does the following:

It uses the stats command to calculate the count of events for each value of the user field. The stats command creates a table with two columns: user and count.

It uses the where command to filter the results by the value of the corndog field. The where command only keeps the rows where corndog equals mysterymeat.

Therefore, the search string creates a table of the total count of mysterymeat corndogs split by user.


Question 448

Use the dedup command to _____.



Answer : B


Question 449
Question 450

Which of the following statements describes POST workflow actions?



Answer : D


Question 451

Which of the following can be used with the eval command tostring function (select all that apply)



Answer : A, B, D

https://docs.splunk.com/Documentation/Splunk/8.1.0/SearchReference/ConversionFunctions#tostring.28X.2CY.29

The tostring function in the eval command converts a numeric value to a string value. It can take an optional second argument that specifies the format of the string value. Some of the possible formats are:

hex: converts the numeric value to a hexadecimal string.

commas: adds commas to separate thousands in the numeric value.

duration: converts the numeric value to a human-readable duration string, such as ''2h 3m 4s''.

Therefore, the formats A, B, and D can be used with the tostring function.


Question 452

In most large Splunk environments, what is the most efficient command that can be used to group events by fields/



Answer : B

https://docs.splunk.com/Documentation/Splunk/8.0.2/Search/Abouttransactions

In other cases, it's usually better to use thestatscommand, which performs more efficiently, especially in a distributed environment. Often there is a unique ID in the events andstatscan be used.


Question 453
Question 454
Question 455

What is the relationship between data models and pivots?



Answer : A

The relationship between data models and pivots is that data models provide the datasets for pivots. Data models are collections of datasets that represent your data in a structured and hierarchical way. Data models define how your data is organized into objects and fields. Pivots are user interfaces that allow you to create data visualizations that present different aspects of a data model. Pivots let you select options from menus and forms to create charts, tables, maps, etc., without writing any SPL code. Pivots use datasets from data models as their source of data. Pivots and data models are not the same thing, as pivots are tools for visualizing data models. Pivots do not provide datasets for data models, but rather use them as inputs.

Therefore, only statement A is true about the relationship between data models and pivots.


Question 456

A user wants to create a new field alias for a field that appears in two sourcetypes.

How many field aliases need to be created?



Answer : B


Question 457
Question 458

Which of the following is one of the pre-configured data models included in the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) add-on?



Answer : D


Question 459
Question 460

What happens when a user edits the regular expression (regex) field extraction generated in the Field Extractor (FX)?



Answer : A


Question 461
Question 462

Which of these stats commands will show the total bytes for each unique combination of page and server?



Answer : B

The correct command to show the total bytes for each unique combination of page and server isindex=web | stats sum (bytes) BY page server. In Splunk, thestatscommand is used to calculate aggregate statistics over the dataset, such as count, sum, avg, etc. When using theBYclause, it groups the results by the specified fields. The correct syntax does not include commas or the word 'AND' between the field names. Instead, it simply lists the field names separated by spaces within theBYclause.

Reference: The usage of thestatscommand with theBYclause is confirmed by examples in the Splunk Community, where it's explained thatstatswith aby foo barwill output one row for every unique combination of thebyfields1.


Question 463
Question 464

Using the Field Extractor (FX) tool, a value is highlighted to extract and give a name to a new field. Splunk has not successfully extracted that value from all appropriate events. What steps can be taken so Splunk successfully extracts the value from all appropriate events? (select all that apply)



Answer : A, D

When using the Field Extractor (FX) tool in Splunk and the tool fails to extract a value from all appropriate events, there are specific steps you can take to improve the extraction process. These steps involve interacting with the FX tool and possibly adjusting the extraction method:

A . Select an additional sample event with the Field Extractor (FX) and highlight the missing value in the event. This approach allows Splunk to understand the pattern better by providing more examples. By highlighting the value in another event where it wasn't extracted, you help the FX tool to learn the variability in the data format or structure, improving the accuracy of the field extraction.

D . Edit the regular expression manually. Sometimes the FX tool might not generate the most accurate regular expression for the field extraction, especially when dealing with complex log formats or subtle nuances in the data. In such cases, manually editing the regular expression can significantly improve the extraction process. This involves understanding regular expression syntax and how Splunk extracts fields, allowing for a more tailored approach to field extraction that accounts for variations in the data that the automatic process might miss.

Options B and C are not typically related to improving field extraction within the Field Extractor tool. Re-ingesting data (B) does not directly impact the extraction process, and changing to a delimited extraction method (C) is not always applicable, as it depends on the specific data format and might not resolve the issue of missing values across events.


Question 465

What are the expected results for a search that contains the command | where A=B?



Answer : C

The correct answer is C. Events where values of field A are equal to values of field B.

The where command is used to filter the search results based on an expression that evaluates to true or false. The where command can compare two fields, two values, or a field and a value. The where command can also use functions, operators, and wildcards to create complex expressions1.

The syntax for the where command is:

| where <expression>

The expression can be a comparison, a calculation, a logical operation, or a combination of these. The expression must evaluate to true or false for each event.

To compare two fields with the where command, you need to use the field names without any quotation marks. For example, if you want to find events where the values for the field A match the values for the field B, you can use the following syntax:

| where A=B

This will return only the events where the two fields have the same value.

The other options are not correct because they use different syntax or fields that are not related to the where command. These options are:

A) Events that contain the string value where A=B: This option uses the string value where A=B as a search term, which is not valid syntax for the where command. This option will return events that have the literal text ''where A=B'' in them.

B) Events that contain the string value A=B: This option uses the string value A=B as a search term, which is not valid syntax for the where command. This option will return events that have the literal text ''A=B'' in them.

D) Events where field A contains the string value B: This option uses quotation marks around the value B, which is not valid syntax for comparing fields with the where command. Quotation marks are used to enclose phrases or exact matches in a search2. This option will return events where the field A contains the string value ''B''.


where command usage

Search command cheatsheet

Question 466

Information needed to create a GET workflow action includes which of the following? (select all that apply.)



Answer : A, B, C


Information needed to create a GET workflow action includes the following: a name of the workflow action, a URI where the user will be directed at search time, and a label that will appear in the Event Action menu at search time. A GET workflow action is a type of workflow action that performs a GET request when you click on a field value in your search results. A GET workflow action can be configured with various options, such as:

A name of the workflow action: This is a unique identifier for the workflow action that is used internally by Splunk. The name should be descriptive and meaningful for the purpose of the workflow action.

A URI where the user will be directed at search time: This is the base URL of the external web service or application that will receive the GET request. The URI can include field value variables that will be replaced by the actual field values at search time. For example, if you have a field value variable ip, you can write it as http://example.com/ip=$ip to send the IP address as a parameter to the external web service or application.

A label that will appear in the Event Action menu at search time: This is the display name of the workflow action that will be shown in the Event Action menu when you click on a field value in your search results. The label should be clear and concise for the user to understand what the workflow action does.

Therefore, options A, B, and C are correct.

Question 467
Question 468

Data models are composed of one or more of which of the following datasets? (select all that apply)



Answer : A, B, C

Data model datasets have a hierarchical relationship with each other, meaning they have parent-child relationships. Data models can contain multiple dataset hierarchies. There are three types of dataset hierarchies: event, search, and transaction.

https://docs.splunk.com/Splexicon:Datamodeldataset


Question 469

Given the following eval statement:

... | eval field1 = if(isnotnull(field1),field1,0), field2 = if(isnull(field2), "NO-VALUE", field2)

Which of the following is the equivalent using fillnull?



Answer : D

The fillnull command can be used to replace null values in specific fields. The correct equivalent expression for the given eval statement would involve using fillnull twice, once for field1 to replace null values with 0, and once for field2 to replace null values with 'NO-VALUE'.


Splunk Docs - fillnull command

Question 470

Which of the following describes the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) add-on?



Answer : C

The Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) add-on is a Splunk app that contains data models to help you normalize data from different sources and formats. The CIM add-on defines a common and consistent way of naming and categorizing fields and events in Splunk. This makes it easier to correlate and analyze data across different domains, such as network, security, web, etc. The CIM add-on does not use machine learning to normalize data, but rather relies on predefined field names and values. The CIM add-on does not contain dashboards that show how to map data, but rather provides documentation and examples on how to use the data models. The CIM add-on is not automatically installed in a Splunk environment, but rather needs to be downloaded and installed from Splunkbase.


Question 471

Data model are composed of one or more of which of the following datasets? (select all that apply.)



Answer : A, B, C


Data models are collections of datasets that represent your data in a structured and hierarchical way. Data models define how your data is organized into objects and fields. Data models can be composed of one or more of the following datasets:

Events datasets: These are the base datasets that represent raw events in Splunk. Events datasets can be filtered by constraints, such as search terms, sourcetypes, indexes, etc.

Search datasets: These are derived datasets that represent the results of a search on events or other datasets. Search datasets can use any search command, such as stats, eval, rex, etc., to transform the data.

Transaction datasets: These are derived datasets that represent groups of events that are related by fields, time, or both. Transaction datasets can use the transaction command or event types with transactiontype=true to create transactions.

Question 472

Which of the following statements describe calculated fields? (select all that apply)



Answer : A, B, D


Calculated fields are fields that are created by performing calculations on existing fields using the eval command. Calculated fields can be used in the search bar to filter and transform events based on the calculated values. Calculated fields can also be based on an extracted field, which is a field that is extracted from raw data using various methods, such as regex, delimiters, lookups, etc. Calculated fields are not shortcuts for performing calculations using the eval command, but rather results of performing calculations using the eval command. Calculated fields can be applied to any field in Splunk, not only host and sourcetype.

Therefore, statements A, B, and D are true about calculated fields.

Question 473

Which of the following expressions could be used to create a calculated field called gigabytes?



Answer : B


Question 474

Data model fields can be added using the Auto-Extracted method. Which of the following statements describe Auto-Extracted fields? (select all that apply)



Question 475

Use the dedup command to _____.



Answer : B


Question 476

For the following search, which field populates the x-axis?

index=security sourcetype=linux secure | timechart count by action



Question 477

What does the fillnull command do in this search?

index=main sourcetype=http_log | fillnull value="Unknown" src



Answer : C

The fillnull command in Splunk is used to replace null (missing) field values with a specified value.

Explanation of options:

A: Incorrect, as fillnull does not set fields to null; it fills null values with a specific value.

B: Incorrect, as the command only affects the specified field (src in this case).

C: Correct, as the fillnull command explicitly sets null values in the src field to 'Unknown'.

D: Incorrect, as only the src field is affected, not all fields.

Example:

If the src field is null for some events, fillnull will populate 'Unknown' in those cases.


Question 478
Question 479
Question 480

When creating an event type, which is allowed in the search string?



Answer : C

When creating an event type in Splunk, subsearches are allowed in the search string. Subsearches enable users to perform a secondary search whose results are used as input for the main search. This functionality is useful for more complex event type definitions that require additional filtering or criteria based on another search.


Splunk Docs: About subsearches

Splunk Docs: Event type creation

Splunk Answers: Using subsearches in event types

Question 481

Consider the following search:

Index=web sourcetype=access_combined

The log shows several events that share the same JSESSIONID value (SD404K289O2F151). View the events as a group. From the following list, which search groups events by JSESSIONID?



Answer : B


Question 482
Question 483
Question 484

Which of the following searches will show the number of categoryld used by each host?



Answer : B


Question 485
Question 486

A field alias has been created based on an original field. A search without any transforming commands is then executed in Smart Mode. Which field name appears in the results?



Question 487

A search contains example(100,200). What is the name of the macro?



Answer : B

In Splunk, macros that accept arguments are defined with placeholders for those arguments in the format example(var1, var2). In the search example(100,200), '100' and '200' are the values passed for var1 and var2 respectively.


Splunk Docs -- Macros

Question 488

Which of the following statements describe calculated fields? (select all that apply)



Answer : A, B, D


Calculated fields are fields that are created by performing calculations on existing fields using the eval command. Calculated fields can be used in the search bar to filter and transform events based on the calculated values. Calculated fields can also be based on an extracted field, which is a field that is extracted from raw data using various methods, such as regex, delimiters, lookups, etc. Calculated fields are not shortcuts for performing calculations using the eval command, but rather results of performing calculations using the eval command. Calculated fields can be applied to any field in Splunk, not only host and sourcetype.

Therefore, statements A, B, and D are true about calculated fields.

Question 489

What is a limitation of searches generated by workflow actions?



Answer : D


Question 490
Question 491
Question 492

Which of the following statements describes the command below (select all that apply)

Sourcetype=access_combined | transaction JSESSIONID



Answer : B, C, D

The commandsourcetype=access_combined | transaction JSESSIONIDdoes three things:

It filters the events by the sourcetypeaccess_combined, which is a predefined sourcetype for Apache web server logs.

It groups the events by the fieldJSESSIONID, which is a unique identifier for each user session.

It creates a single event from each group of events that share the sameJSESSIONIDvalue. This single event will have some additional fields created by the transaction command, such asduration,eventcount, andstartime.

Therefore, the statements B, C, and D are true.


Question 493
Question 494

What are search macros?



Question 495

What does the fillnull command replace null values with, it the value argument is not specified?



Answer : A


The fillnull command is a search command that replaces null values with a specified value or 0 if no value is specified. Null values are values that are missing, empty, or undefined in Splunk. The fillnull command can replace null values for all fields or for specific fields. The fillnull command can take an optional argument called value that specifies the value to replace null values with. If no value argument is specified, the fillnull command will replace null values with 0 by default.

Question 496

Which method in the Field Extractor would extract the port number from the following event? |

10/20/2022 - 125.24.20.1 ++++ port 54 - user: admin



Answer : B

The rex command allows you to extract fields from events using regular expressions. You can use the rex command to specify a named group that matches the port number in the event. For example:

rex '\+\+\+\+port (?\d+)'

This will create a field called port with the value 54 for the event.

The delimiter method is not suitable for this event because there is no consistent delimiter between the fields. The regular expression method is not a valid option for the Field Extractor tool. The Field Extractor tool can extract regular expressions, but it is not a method by itself.


Question 497

Which of the following statements about tags is true?



Answer : B

Tags are a knowledge object that allow you to assign an alias to one or more field values . Tags are applied to events at search time and can be used as search terms or filters .

Tags can help you make your data more understandable by replacing cryptic or complex field values with meaningful names . For example, you can tag the value200in thestatusfield assuccess, or tag the value404asnot_found.


Question 498

In most large Splunk environments, what is the most efficient command that can be used to group events by fields/



Answer : B

https://docs.splunk.com/Documentation/Splunk/8.0.2/Search/Abouttransactions

In other cases, it's usually better to use thestatscommand, which performs more efficiently, especially in a distributed environment. Often there is a unique ID in the events andstatscan be used.


Question 499

What are the expected results for a search that contains the command | where A=B?



Answer : C

The correct answer is C. Events where values of field A are equal to values of field B.

The where command is used to filter the search results based on an expression that evaluates to true or false. The where command can compare two fields, two values, or a field and a value. The where command can also use functions, operators, and wildcards to create complex expressions1.

The syntax for the where command is:

| where <expression>

The expression can be a comparison, a calculation, a logical operation, or a combination of these. The expression must evaluate to true or false for each event.

To compare two fields with the where command, you need to use the field names without any quotation marks. For example, if you want to find events where the values for the field A match the values for the field B, you can use the following syntax:

| where A=B

This will return only the events where the two fields have the same value.

The other options are not correct because they use different syntax or fields that are not related to the where command. These options are:

A) Events that contain the string value where A=B: This option uses the string value where A=B as a search term, which is not valid syntax for the where command. This option will return events that have the literal text ''where A=B'' in them.

B) Events that contain the string value A=B: This option uses the string value A=B as a search term, which is not valid syntax for the where command. This option will return events that have the literal text ''A=B'' in them.

D) Events where field A contains the string value B: This option uses quotation marks around the value B, which is not valid syntax for comparing fields with the where command. Quotation marks are used to enclose phrases or exact matches in a search2. This option will return events where the field A contains the string value ''B''.


where command usage

Search command cheatsheet

Question 500
Question 501

The stats command will create a _____________ by default.



Answer : A


Question 502

These users can create global knowledge objects. (Select all that apply.)



Answer : B, C


Question 503
Question 504

which of the following commands are used when creating visualizations(select all that apply.)



Answer : A, C, D

The following commands are used when creating visualizations: geom, geostats, and iplocation. Visualizations are graphical representations of data that show trends, patterns, or comparisons. Visualizations can have different types, such as charts, tables, maps, etc. Visualizations can be created by using various commands that transform the data into a suitable format for the visualization type. Some of the commands that are used when creating visualizations are:

geom: This command is used to create choropleth maps that show geographic regions with different colors based on some metric. The geom command takes a KMZ file as an argument that defines the geographic regions and their boundaries. The geom command also takes a field name as an argument that specifies the metric to use for coloring the regions.

geostats: This command is used to create cluster maps that show groups of events with different sizes and colors based on some metric. The geostats command takes a latitude and longitude field as arguments that specify the location of the events. The geostats command also takes a statistical function as an argument that specifies the metric to use for sizing and coloring the clusters.

iplocation: This command is used to create location-based visualizations that show events with different attributes based on their IP addresses. The iplocation command takes an IP address field as an argument and adds some additional fields to the events, such as Country, City, Latitude, Longitude, etc. The iplocation command can be used with other commands such as geom or geostats to create maps based on IP addresses.


Question 505

This is what Splunk uses to categorize the data that is being indexed.



Answer : B


Question 506
Question 507

What is the correct syntax to find events associated with a tag?



Answer : D

The correct syntax to find events associated with a tag in Splunk is tag=<value>1. So, the correct answer is D) tag=<value>. This syntax allows you to annotate specified fields in your search results with tags1.

In Splunk, tags are a type of knowledge object that you can use to add meaningful aliases to field values in your data1. For example, if you have a field called status_code in your data, you might have different status codes like 200, 404, 500, etc. You can create tags for these status codes like success for 200, not_found for 404, and server_error for 500. Then, you can use the tag command in your searches to find events associated with these tags1.

Here is an example of how you can use the tag command in a search:

index=main sourcetype=access_combined | tag status_code

In this search, the tag command annotates the status_code field in the search results with the corresponding tags. If you have tagged the status code 200 with success, the status code 404 with not_found, and the status code 500 with server_error, the search results will include these tags1.

You can also use the tag command with a specific tag value to find events associated with that tag. For example, the following search finds all events where the status code is tagged with success:

index=main sourcetype=access_combined | tag status_code | search tag::status_code=success

In this search, the tag command annotates the status_code field with the corresponding tags, and the search command filters the results to include only events where the status_code field is tagged with success1.


Question 508

When extracting fields, we may choose to use our own regular expressions



Answer : A


Question 509

By default, how is acceleration configured in the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) add-on?



Answer : D

By default, acceleration is determined automatically based on the data source in the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) add-on. The Splunk CIM Add-on is an app that provides common data models for various domains, such as network traffic, web activity, authentication, etc. The CIM Add-on allows you to normalize and enrich your data using predefined fields and tags. The CIM Add-on also allows you to accelerate your data models for faster searches and reports. Acceleration is a feature that pre-computes summary data for your data models and stores them in tsidx files. Acceleration can improve the performance and efficiency of your searches and reports that use data models.

By default, acceleration is determined automatically based on the data source in the CIM Add-on. This means that Splunk will decide whether to enable or disable acceleration for each data model based on some factors, such as data volume, data type, data model complexity, etc. However, you can also manually enable or disable acceleration for each data model by using the Settings menu or by editing the datamodels.conf file.


Question 510

This function of the stats command allows you to identify the number of values a field has.



Answer : D


Question 511

A macro has another macro nested within it, and this inner macro requires an argument. How can the user pass this argument into the SPL?



Answer : D

The correct answer is D. An argument can be passed to the inner macro by nesting parentheses.

A search macro is a way to reuse a piece of SPL code in different searches. A search macro can take arguments, which are variables that can be replaced by different values when the macro is called. A search macro can also contain another search macro within it, which is called a nested macro. A nested macro can also take arguments, which can be passed from the outer macro or directly from the search string.

To pass an argument to the inner macro, you need to use parentheses to enclose the argument value and separate it from the outer macro argument. For example, if you have a search macro named outer_macro (1) that contains another search macro named inner_macro (2), and both macros take one argument each, you can pass an argument to the inner macro by using the following syntax:

outer_macro (argument1, inner_macro (argument2))

This will replace the argument1 and argument2 with the values you provide in the search string. For example, if you want to pass ''foo'' as the argument1 and ''bar'' as the argument2, you can write:

outer_macro ('foo', inner_macro ('bar'))

This will expand the macros with the corresponding arguments and run the SPL code contained in them.


Search macro examples

Use search macros in searches

Question 512

A user wants a table that will show the total revenue made for each product in each sales region. Which would be the correct SPL query to use?



Answer : B

The chart command with sum(price) by product, region will return a table where the total revenue (price) is aggregated (sum) for each product and sales region. This is the correct way to aggregate data in Splunk.


Splunk Docs - chart command

Question 513

Which of the following statements describe calculated fields? (select all that apply)



Answer : A, B, D


Calculated fields are fields that are created by performing calculations on existing fields using the eval command. Calculated fields can be used in the search bar to filter and transform events based on the calculated values. Calculated fields can also be based on an extracted field, which is a field that is extracted from raw data using various methods, such as regex, delimiters, lookups, etc. Calculated fields are not shortcuts for performing calculations using the eval command, but rather results of performing calculations using the eval command. Calculated fields can be applied to any field in Splunk, not only host and sourcetype.

Therefore, statements A, B, and D are true about calculated fields.

Question 514

What is the correct way to name a macro with two arguments?



Answer : D


Question 515

When would transaction be used instead of stats?



Answer : D

The transaction command is used to group events that are related by some common fields or conditions, such as start/end values, time span, or pauses. The stats command is used to calculate statistics on a group of events by a common field value.

Reference

Splunk Community

Splunk Transaction - Exact Details You Need


Question 516
Question 517
Question 518

Which of the following Statements about macros is true? (select all that apply)



Question 519

Complete the search, .... | _____ failure>successes



Answer : B

The where command can be used to complete the search below.

... | where failure>successes

The where command is a search command that allows you to filter events based on complex or custom criteri

a. The where command can use any boolean expression or function to evaluate each event and determine whether to keep it or discard it. The where command can also compare fields or perform calculations on fields using operators such as >, <, =, +, -, etc. The where command can be used after any transforming command that creates a table or a chart.

The search string below does the following:

It uses ... to represent any search criteria or commands before the where command.

It uses the where command to filter events based on a comparison between two fields: failure and successes.

It uses the greater than operator (>) to compare the values of failure and successes fields for each event.

It only keeps events where failure is greater than successes.


Question 520

Which of the following is one of the pre-configured data models included in the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) add-on?



Answer : D


Question 521

What is the purpose of the fillnull command?



Answer : A

The fillnull command in Splunk is used to handle missing data within search results. It plays a crucial role in data normalization and preparation, especially before performing statistical analyses or visualizations.

A . Replace empty values with a specified value: This is the correct answer. The fillnull command is specifically designed to replace null values (empty values) with a specified default value. This is particularly useful in ensuring consistency within your data, especially when performing operations that require numerical values or when you want to distinguish between genuinely missing data and zeroes, for instance.

Example Usage: ... | fillnull value=0 This command would replace all null values in the search results with 0.


Question 522

Field aliases are used to __________ data



Answer : D


Question 523

Which of the following statements describes macros?



Answer : C


A macro is a reusable search string that can contain any part of a search, such as search terms, commands, arguments, etc. A macro can have a flexible time range that can be specified when the macro is executed. A macro can also have arguments that can be passed to the macro when it is executed. A macro can be created by using the Settings menu or by editing the macros.conf file. A macro does not have to contain the full search, but only the part that needs to be reused. A macro does not have to have a fixed time range, but can use a relative or absolute time range modifier. A macro does not have to contain only a portion of the search, but can contain multiple parts of the search.

Question 524

This function of the stats command allows you to return the middle-most value of field X.



Answer : A


Question 525

Which of the following transforming commands can be used with transactions?

chart, timechart, stats, eventstats

chart, timechart, stats, diff

chart, timeehart, datamodel, pivot

chart, timecha:t, stats, pivot



Answer : A

The correct answer is


About transforming commands

About transactions

chart command overview

timechart command overview

stats command overview

[eventstats command overview]

[diff command overview]

[datamodel command overview]

[pivot command overview]

Question 526
Question 527

A calculated field is a shortcut for performing repetitive, long, or complex transformations using which of the following commands?



Answer : D

The correct answer is D. eval.

A calculated field is a field that is added to events at search time by using an eval expression. A calculated field can use the values of two or more fields that are already present in the events to perform calculations. A calculated field can be defined with Splunk Web or in the props.conf file. They can be used in searches, reports, dashboards, and data models like any other extracted field1.

A calculated field is a shortcut for performing repetitive, long, or complex transformations using the eval command. The eval command is used to create or modify fields by using expressions. The eval command can perform mathematical, string, date and time, comparison, logical, and other operations on fields or values2.

For example, if you want to create a new field named total that is the sum of two fields named price and tax, you can use the eval command as follows:

| eval total=price+tax

However, if you want to use this new field in multiple searches, reports, or dashboards, you can create a calculated field instead of writing the eval command every time. To create a calculated field with Splunk Web, you need to go to Settings > Fields > Calculated Fields and enter the name of the new field (total), the name of the sourcetype (sales), and the eval expression (price+tax). This will create a calculated field named total that will be added to all events with the sourcetype sales at search time. You can then use the total field like any other extracted field without writing the eval expression1.

The other options are not correct because they are not related to calculated fields. These options are:

A) transaction: This command is used to group events that share some common values into a single record, called a transaction. A transaction can span multiple events and multiple sources, and can be useful for correlating events that are related but not contiguous3.

B) lookup: This command is used to enrich events with additional fields from an external source, such as a CSV file or a database. A lookup can add fields to events based on the values of existing fields, such as host, source, sourcetype, or any other extracted field.

C) stats: This command is used to calculate summary statistics on the fields in the search results, such as count, sum, average, etc. It can be used to group and aggregate data by one or more fields.


About calculated fields

eval command overview

transaction command overview

[lookup command overview]

[stats command overview]

Question 528

Which of the following is true about the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM)?



Answer : D

The Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) is an app that contains a set of predefined data models that apply a common structure and naming convention to data from any source. The CIM enables you to use data from different sources in a consistent and coherent way. The CIM contains 28 pre-configured datasets that cover various domains such as authentication, network traffic, web, email, etc. The data models included in the CIM are configured with data model acceleration turned on by default, which means that they are optimized for faster searches and analysis. Data model acceleration creates and maintains summary data for the data models, which reduces the amount of raw data that needs to be scanned when you run a search using a data model.

: Splunk Core Certified Power User Track, page 10. : Splunk Documentation, About the Splunk Common Information Model.


Question 529

Consider the following search:

Index=web sourcetype=access_combined

The log shows several events that share the same JSESSIONID value (SD404K289O2F151). View the events as a group. From the following list, which search groups events by JSESSIONID?



Answer : B


Question 530

Which of the following searches show a valid use of macro? (Select all that apply)



Question 531
Question 532

What other syntax will produce exactly the same results as | chart count over vendor_action by user?



Question 533
Question 534
Question 535

What are the expected results for a search that contains the command | where A=B?



Answer : C

The correct answer is C. Events where values of field A are equal to values of field B.

The where command is used to filter the search results based on an expression that evaluates to true or false. The where command can compare two fields, two values, or a field and a value. The where command can also use functions, operators, and wildcards to create complex expressions1.

The syntax for the where command is:

| where <expression>

The expression can be a comparison, a calculation, a logical operation, or a combination of these. The expression must evaluate to true or false for each event.

To compare two fields with the where command, you need to use the field names without any quotation marks. For example, if you want to find events where the values for the field A match the values for the field B, you can use the following syntax:

| where A=B

This will return only the events where the two fields have the same value.

The other options are not correct because they use different syntax or fields that are not related to the where command. These options are:

A) Events that contain the string value where A=B: This option uses the string value where A=B as a search term, which is not valid syntax for the where command. This option will return events that have the literal text ''where A=B'' in them.

B) Events that contain the string value A=B: This option uses the string value A=B as a search term, which is not valid syntax for the where command. This option will return events that have the literal text ''A=B'' in them.

D) Events where field A contains the string value B: This option uses quotation marks around the value B, which is not valid syntax for comparing fields with the where command. Quotation marks are used to enclose phrases or exact matches in a search2. This option will return events where the field A contains the string value ''B''.


where command usage

Search command cheatsheet

Question 536
Question 537

When using the eval command, which of these characters can be used to concatenate a string and a number into a single value?



Answer : D

In Splunk, the eval command is often used for manipulating field values, including concatenation. The correct way to concatenate a string and a number is to use the . (period) operator. This operator joins different types of data into a single string value.

For example:

eval concatenated_value = 'value_' . 123

Result: concatenated_value will be value_123.

Other operators:

& is not a valid operator in eval for concatenation.

+ is used for arithmetic addition, not concatenation.

- is also not a concatenation operator.


Question 538

Which of the following statements describe GET workflow actions?



Answer : D

GET workflow actions are custom actions that open a URL link when you click on a field value in your search results. GET workflow actions can be configured with various options, such as label name, base URL, URI parameters, app context, etc. One of the options is to choose whether to open the URL link in the current window or in a new window. GET workflow actions do not have to be configured with POST arguments, as they use GET method to send requests to web servers. Configuration of GET workflow actions does not include choosing a sourcetype, as they do not generate any data in Splunk. Label names for GET workflow actions must include a field name surrounded by dollar signs, as this indicates the field value that will be used to replace the variable in the URL link.


Question 539

A search contains example(100,200). What is the name of the macro?



Answer : B

In Splunk, macros that accept arguments are defined with placeholders for those arguments in the format example(var1, var2). In the search example(100,200), '100' and '200' are the values passed for var1 and var2 respectively.


Splunk Docs -- Macros

Question 540
Question 541

A calculated field may be based on which of the following?



Answer : D

In Splunk, calculated fields allow you to create new fields using expressions that can transform or combine the values of existing fields. Although all options provided might seem viable, when selecting only one option that is most representative of a calculated field, we typically refer to:

D . Extracted fields: Calculated fields are often based on fields that have already been extracted from your data.

Extracted fields are those that Splunk has identified and pulled out from the event data based on patterns, delimiters, or other methods such as regular expressions or automatic extractions. These fields can then be used in expressions to create calculated fields.

For example, you might have an extracted field for the time in seconds, and you want to create a calculated field for the time in minutes. You would use the extracted field in a calculation to create the new field.


Question 542

A macro has another macro nested within it, and this inner macro requires an argument. How can the user pass this argument into the SPL?



Answer : D

The correct answer is D. An argument can be passed to the inner macro by nesting parentheses.

A search macro is a way to reuse a piece of SPL code in different searches. A search macro can take arguments, which are variables that can be replaced by different values when the macro is called. A search macro can also contain another search macro within it, which is called a nested macro. A nested macro can also take arguments, which can be passed from the outer macro or directly from the search string.

To pass an argument to the inner macro, you need to use parentheses to enclose the argument value and separate it from the outer macro argument. For example, if you have a search macro named outer_macro (1) that contains another search macro named inner_macro (2), and both macros take one argument each, you can pass an argument to the inner macro by using the following syntax:

outer_macro (argument1, inner_macro (argument2))

This will replace the argument1 and argument2 with the values you provide in the search string. For example, if you want to pass ''foo'' as the argument1 and ''bar'' as the argument2, you can write:

outer_macro ('foo', inner_macro ('bar'))

This will expand the macros with the corresponding arguments and run the SPL code contained in them.


Search macro examples

Use search macros in searches

Question 543
Question 544

Which command can include both an over and a by clause to divide results into sub-groupings?



Answer : A


Question 545

A user wants to create a new field alias for a field that appears in two sourcetypes.

How many field aliases need to be created?



Answer : B


Question 546

When using the timechart command, how can a user group the events into buckets based on time?



Answer : A


Question 547
Question 548

Which of the following statements describes calculated fields?



Answer : B


Question 549

Which workflow uses field values to perform a secondary search?



Question 550

Which type of workflow action sends field values to an external resource (e.g. a ticketing system)?



Answer : A

The type of workflow action that sends field values to an external resource (e.g. a ticketing system) is POST. A POST workflow action allows you to send a POST request to a URI location with field values or static values as arguments. For example, you can use a POST workflow action to create a ticket in an external system with information from an event.


Question 551

Calculated fields can be based on which of the following?



Answer : B

'Calculated fields can reference all types of field extractions and field aliasing, but they cannot reference lookups, event types, or tags.'


Question 552

A POST workflow action will pass which types of arguments to an external website?



Answer : B

A POST workflow action in Splunk is designed to send data to an external web service by using HTTP POST requests. This type of workflow action can pass a combination of clear text strings and variables derived from the search results or event data. The clear text strings might include static text or predefined values, while the variables are dynamic elements that represent specific fields or values extracted from the Splunk events. This flexibility allows for constructing detailed and context-specific requests to external systems, enabling various integration and automation scenarios. The POST request can include both types of data, making it versatile for different use cases.


Question 553

For the following search, which command would further filter for only IP addresses present more than five times?



Answer : A

To filter for only IP addresses that appear more than five times in the search results for index=games, you can use a combination of the stats and where commands. The stats command counts the occurrences of each IP address and assigns the count to IP_count. The where command then filters the results to include only those IP addresses with a count greater than five.

Here is how the complete search would look:

index=games | stats count as IP_count by IP | where IP_count > 5


Splunk Docs: stats command

Splunk Docs: where command

Splunk Answers: Filtering results using stats and where commands

Question 554
Question 555
Question 556

Which of the following searches show a valid use of macro? (Select all that apply)



Question 557

A user wants to convert numeric field values to strings and also to sort on those values.

Which command should be used first, the eval or the sort?



Question 558

Which statement is true?



Answer : C

The statement that pivot is used for creating reports and dashboards is true. Pivot is a graphical interface that allows you to create tables, charts, and visualizations from data models. Data models are structured datasets that define how data is organized and categorized. Pivot does not create datasets, but uses existing ones.


Question 559

A calculated field is a shortcut for performing repetitive, long, or complex transformations using which of the following commands?



Answer : D

The correct answer is D. eval.

A calculated field is a field that is added to events at search time by using an eval expression. A calculated field can use the values of two or more fields that are already present in the events to perform calculations. A calculated field can be defined with Splunk Web or in the props.conf file. They can be used in searches, reports, dashboards, and data models like any other extracted field1.

A calculated field is a shortcut for performing repetitive, long, or complex transformations using the eval command. The eval command is used to create or modify fields by using expressions. The eval command can perform mathematical, string, date and time, comparison, logical, and other operations on fields or values2.

For example, if you want to create a new field named total that is the sum of two fields named price and tax, you can use the eval command as follows:

| eval total=price+tax

However, if you want to use this new field in multiple searches, reports, or dashboards, you can create a calculated field instead of writing the eval command every time. To create a calculated field with Splunk Web, you need to go to Settings > Fields > Calculated Fields and enter the name of the new field (total), the name of the sourcetype (sales), and the eval expression (price+tax). This will create a calculated field named total that will be added to all events with the sourcetype sales at search time. You can then use the total field like any other extracted field without writing the eval expression1.

The other options are not correct because they are not related to calculated fields. These options are:

A) transaction: This command is used to group events that share some common values into a single record, called a transaction. A transaction can span multiple events and multiple sources, and can be useful for correlating events that are related but not contiguous3.

B) lookup: This command is used to enrich events with additional fields from an external source, such as a CSV file or a database. A lookup can add fields to events based on the values of existing fields, such as host, source, sourcetype, or any other extracted field.

C) stats: This command is used to calculate summary statistics on the fields in the search results, such as count, sum, average, etc. It can be used to group and aggregate data by one or more fields.


About calculated fields

eval command overview

transaction command overview

[lookup command overview]

[stats command overview]

Question 560

Which of the following searches will return all clientip addresses that start with 108?



Answer : A


Question 561

It is mandatory for the lookup file to have this for an automatic lookup to work.



Answer : D


Question 562
Question 563
Question 564

Which of the following statements about data models and pivot are true? (select all that apply)



Answer : D

Data models and pivot are both knowledge objects in Splunk that allow you to analyze and visualize your data in different ways. Data models are collections of datasets that represent your data in a structured and hierarchical way. Data models define how your data is organized into objects and fields. Pivot is a user interface that allows you to create data visualizations that present different aspects of a data model. Pivot does not require users to input SPL searches on data models, but rather lets them select options from menus and forms. Data models are not created out of datasets called pivots, but rather pivots are created from datasets in data models.


Question 565

A user wants a table that will show the total revenue made for each product in each sales region. Which would be the correct SPL query to use?



Answer : B

The chart command with sum(price) by product, region will return a table where the total revenue (price) is aggregated (sum) for each product and sales region. This is the correct way to aggregate data in Splunk.


Splunk Docs - chart command

Question 566

When should transaction be used?



Answer : C


Question 567

What happens to the original field name when a field alias is created?



Answer : A

Creating a field alias in Splunk does not modify or remove the original field. Instead, the alias allows the same data to be accessed using a different field name without affecting the original field.


Question 568

Which of the following is true about the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM)?



Answer : D

The Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) is an app that contains a set of predefined data models that apply a common structure and naming convention to data from any source. The CIM enables you to use data from different sources in a consistent and coherent way. The CIM contains 28 pre-configured datasets that cover various domains such as authentication, network traffic, web, email, etc. The data models included in the CIM are configured with data model acceleration turned on by default, which means that they are optimized for faster searches and analysis. Data model acceleration creates and maintains summary data for the data models, which reduces the amount of raw data that needs to be scanned when you run a search using a data model.

: Splunk Core Certified Power User Track, page 10. : Splunk Documentation, About the Splunk Common Information Model.


Question 569

Brad created a tag called "SpecialProjectX". It is associated with several field/value pairs, such as team=support, location=Austin, and release=Fuji. What search should Brad run to filter results for SpecialProjectX events related to the Support Team?



Answer : B

Tags in Splunk allow users to assign multiple field-value pairs to a common label.

The correct syntax to filter by tag is tag::<field>=<tag_name>.

tag::team=SpecialProjectX will filter results where team=support is associated with the tag SpecialProjectX.

tag=SpecialProjectX searches for all events associated with SpecialProjectX, not just the support team.

tag::Support-SpecialProjectX is incorrect syntax.

tag!=Fuji,Austin is incorrect since it does not filter using the SpecialProjectX tag.

Reference: Splunk Docs - Tags


Question 570
Question 571
Question 572
Question 573

Which statement is true?



Answer : C

The statement that pivot is used for creating reports and dashboards is true. Pivot is a graphical interface that allows you to create tables, charts, and visualizations from data models. Data models are structured datasets that define how data is organized and categorized. Pivot does not create datasets, but uses existing ones.


Question 574

When using the transaction command, what does the argument maxspan do?



Answer : C


Question 575
Question 576

Which delimiters can the Field Extractor (FX) detect? (select all that apply)



Answer : B, C, D


The Field Extractor (FX) is a tool that helps you extract fields from your data using delimiters or regular expressions. Delimiters are characters or strings that separate fields in your data. The FX can detect some common delimiters automatically, such as pipes (|), spaces ( ), commas (,), semicolons (;), etc. The FX cannot detect tabs (\t) as delimiters automatically, but you can specify them manually in the FX interface.

Question 577

Given the macro definition below, what should be entered into the Name and Arguments fileds to correctly configured the macro?



Answer : B


The macro definition below shows a macro that tracks user sessions based on two arguments: action and JSESSIONID.

sessiontracker(2)

The macro definition does the following:

It specifies the name of the macro as sessiontracker. This is the name that will be used to execute the macro in a search string.

It specifies the number of arguments for the macro as 2. This indicates that the macro takes two arguments when it is executed.

It specifies the code for the macro as index=main sourcetype=access_combined_wcookie action=$action$ JSESSIONID=$JSESSIONID$ | stats count by JSESSIONID. This is the search string that will be run when the macro is executed. The search string can contain any part of a search, such as search terms, commands, arguments, etc. The search string can also include variables for the arguments using dollar signs around them. In this case, action and JSESSIONID are variables for the arguments that will be replaced by their values when the macro is executed.

Therefore, to correctly configure the macro, you should enter sessiontracker as the name and action, JSESSIONID as the arguments. Alternatively, you can use sessiontracker(2) as the name and leave the arguments blank.

Question 578

For the following search, which command would further filter for only IP addresses present more than five times?



Answer : A

To filter for only IP addresses that appear more than five times in the search results for index=games, you can use a combination of the stats and where commands. The stats command counts the occurrences of each IP address and assigns the count to IP_count. The where command then filters the results to include only those IP addresses with a count greater than five.

Here is how the complete search would look:

index=games | stats count as IP_count by IP | where IP_count > 5


Splunk Docs: stats command

Splunk Docs: where command

Splunk Answers: Filtering results using stats and where commands

Question 579

When using the transaction command, what does the argument maxspan do?



Answer : C


Question 580

Which of the following Statements about macros is true? (select all that apply)



Question 581
Question 582
Question 583
Question 584

Which of the following statements is true about the root dataset of a data model?



Answer : B

In Splunk, a data model's root dataset is the foundational element upon which the rest of the data model is built. The root dataset can be of various types, including search, transaction, or event-based datasets. One of the key features of the root dataset is that it automatically inherits the knowledge objects associated with its base search. These knowledge objects include field extractions, lookups, aliases, and calculated fields that are defined for the base search, ensuring that the root dataset has all necessary contextual information from the outset. This allows users to build upon this dataset with additional child datasets and objects without having to redefine the base search's knowledge objects.


Question 585

For the following search, which field populates the x-axis?

index=security sourcetype=linux secure | timechart count by action



Question 586

In which Settings section are macros defined?



Answer : C


Question 587

When using the timechart command, how can a user group the events into buckets based on time?



Answer : A


Question 588
Question 589

A search contains example(100,200). What is the name of the macro?



Answer : B

In Splunk, macros that accept arguments are defined with placeholders for those arguments in the format example(var1, var2). In the search example(100,200), '100' and '200' are the values passed for var1 and var2 respectively.


Splunk Docs -- Macros

Question 590

The gauge command:



Answer : B


Question 591

The eval command 'if' function requires the following three arguments (in order):



Answer : A

The eval command 'if' function requires the following three arguments (in order): boolean expression, result if true, result if false. The eval command is a search command that allows you to create new fields or modify existing fields by performing calculations or transformations on them. The eval command can use various functions to perform different operations on fields. The 'if' function is one of the functions that can be used with the eval command to perform conditional evaluations on fields. The 'if' function takes three arguments: a boolean expression that evaluates to true or false, a result that will be returned if the boolean expression is true, and a result that will be returned if the boolean expression is false. The 'if' function returns one of the two results based on the evaluation of the boolean expression.


Question 592

Which of the following data models are included in the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) add-on? (select all that apply)



Answer : B, D

The Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) Add-on includes a variety of data models designed to normalize data from different sources to allow for cross-source reporting and analysis. Among the data models included, Alerts (Option B) and Email (Option D) are part of the CIM. The Alerts data model is used for data related to alerts and incidents, while the Email data model is used for data pertaining to email messages and transactions. User permissions (Option A) and Databases (Option C) are not data models included in the CIM; rather, they pertain to aspects of data access control and specific types of data sources, respectively, which are outside the scope of the CIM's predefined data models.


Question 593

Which of the following statements describes this search?

sourcetype=access_combined I transaction JSESSIONID | timechart avg (duration)



Question 594
Question 595

The macro weekly sales (2) contains the search string:

index=games | eval ProductSales = $Price$ * $AmountSold$

Which of the following will return results?



Answer : C

To use a search macro in a search string, you need to place a back tick character (`) before and after the macro name1. You also need to use the same number of arguments as defined in the macro2. The macro weekly sales (2) has two arguments: Price and AmountSold. Therefore, you need to provide two values for these arguments when you call the macro.

The option A is incorrect because it uses parentheses instead of back ticks around the macro name. The option B is incorrect because it uses underscores instead of spaces in the macro name. The option D is incorrect because it uses spaces instead of commas to separate the argument values.


Question 596

A field alias has been created based on an original field. A search without any transforming commands is then executed in Smart Mode. Which field name appears in the results?



Question 597

Which of the following searches will return all clientip addresses that start with 108?



Answer : A


Question 598

Which of the following commands will show the maximum bytes?



Answer : C


Question 599

Consider the following search:

index=web sourcetype=access_corabined

The log shows several events that share the same jsesszonid value (SD462K101O2F267). View the events as a group.

From the following list, which search groups events by jSSESSIONID?



Question 600
Question 601

Which knowledge Object does the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) use to normalize dat

a. in addition to field aliases, event types, and tags?



Answer : B

Normalize your data for each of these fields using a combination of field aliases, field extractions, and lookups.

https://docs.splunk.com/Documentation/CIM/4.15.0/User/UsetheCIMtonormalizedataatsearchtime


Question 602

How can an existing accelerated data model be edited?



Answer : C

An existing accelerated data model can be edited, but the data model must be de-accelerated before any structural edits can be made (Option C). This is because the acceleration process involves pre-computing and storing data, and changes to the data model's structure could invalidate or conflict with the pre-computed data. Once the data model is de-accelerated and edits are completed, it can be re-accelerated to optimize performance.


Question 603
Question 604

In most large Splunk environments, what is the most efficient command that can be used to group events by fields/



Answer : B

https://docs.splunk.com/Documentation/Splunk/8.0.2/Search/Abouttransactions

In other cases, it's usually better to use thestatscommand, which performs more efficiently, especially in a distributed environment. Often there is a unique ID in the events andstatscan be used.


Question 605

Which of the following statements describe the search below? (select all that apply)

Index=main I transaction clientip host maxspan=30s maxpause=5s



Answer : A, B, D

The search below groups events by two or more fields (clientip and host), creates transactions with start and end constraints (maxspan=30s and maxpause=5s), and calculates the duration of each transaction.

index=main | transaction clientip host maxspan=30s maxpause=5s

The search does the following:

It filters the events by the index main, which is a default index in Splunk that contains all data that is not sent to other indexes.

It uses the transaction command to group events into transactions based on two fields: clientip and host. The transaction command creates new events from groups of events that share the same clientip and host values.

It specifies the start and end constraints for the transactions using the maxspan and maxpause arguments. The maxspan argument sets the maximum time span between the first and last events in a transaction. The maxpause argument sets the maximum time span between any two consecutive events in a transaction. In this case, the maxspan is 30 seconds and the maxpause is 5 seconds, meaning that any transaction that has a longer time span or pause will be split into multiple transactions.

It creates some additional fields for each transaction, such as duration, eventcount, startime, etc. The duration field shows the time span between the first and last events in a transaction.


Question 606

Which of the following describes the I transaction command?



Answer : C

Thetransactioncommand is a Splunk command that finds transactions based on events that meet various constraints .

Transactions are made up of the raw text (the _raw field) of each member, the time and date fields of the earliest member, as well as the union of all other fields of each member .

Thetransactioncommand groups events together by matching one or more fields that have the same value across the events . For example,| transaction clientipwill group events that have the same value in theclientipfield.


Question 607

A user wants to create a workflow action that will retrieve a specific field value from an event and run a search in a new browser window

in the user's Splunk instance. What kind of workflow action should they create?



Answer : B

A Search workflow action is the appropriate choice when a user wants to retrieve a specific field value from an event and run a search in a new browser window within their Splunk instance (Option B). This type of workflow action allows users to define a search that utilizes field values from selected events as parameters, enabling more detailed investigation or context-specific analysis based on the original search results.


Question 608

A user wants a table that will show the total revenue made for each product in each sales region. Which would be the correct SPL query to use?



Answer : B

The chart command with sum(price) by product, region will return a table where the total revenue (price) is aggregated (sum) for each product and sales region. This is the correct way to aggregate data in Splunk.


Splunk Docs - chart command

Question 609

Using the Field Extractor (FX) tool, a value is highlighted to extract and give a name to a new field. Splunk has not successfully extracted that value from all appropriate events. What steps can be taken so Splunk successfully extracts the value from all appropriate events? (select all that apply)



Answer : A, D

When using the Field Extractor (FX) tool in Splunk and the tool fails to extract a value from all appropriate events, there are specific steps you can take to improve the extraction process. These steps involve interacting with the FX tool and possibly adjusting the extraction method:

A . Select an additional sample event with the Field Extractor (FX) and highlight the missing value in the event. This approach allows Splunk to understand the pattern better by providing more examples. By highlighting the value in another event where it wasn't extracted, you help the FX tool to learn the variability in the data format or structure, improving the accuracy of the field extraction.

D . Edit the regular expression manually. Sometimes the FX tool might not generate the most accurate regular expression for the field extraction, especially when dealing with complex log formats or subtle nuances in the data. In such cases, manually editing the regular expression can significantly improve the extraction process. This involves understanding regular expression syntax and how Splunk extracts fields, allowing for a more tailored approach to field extraction that accounts for variations in the data that the automatic process might miss.

Options B and C are not typically related to improving field extraction within the Field Extractor tool. Re-ingesting data (B) does not directly impact the extraction process, and changing to a delimited extraction method (C) is not always applicable, as it depends on the specific data format and might not resolve the issue of missing values across events.


Question 610

The limit attribute will___________.



Answer : A


Question 611
Question 612

Which workflow action method can be used the action type is set to link?



Answer : A

https://docs.splunk.com/Documentation/Splunk/8.0.2/Knowledge/SetupaGETworkflowaction

Define a GET workflow action

Steps

Navigate toSettings > Fields > Workflow Actions.

ClickNewto open up a new workflow action form.

Define aLabelfor the action.

TheLabelfield enables you to define the text that is displayed in either the field or event workflow menu. Labels can be static or include the value of relevant fields.

Determine whether the workflow action applies to specific fields or event types in your data.

UseApply only to the following fieldsto identify one or more fields. When you identify fields, the workflow action only appears for events that have those fields, either in their event menu or field menus. If you leave it blank or enter an asterisk the action appears in menus for all fields.

UseApply only to the following event typesto identify one or more event types. If you identify an event type, the workflow action only appears in the event menus for events that belong to the event type.

ForShow action indetermine whether you want the action to appear in theEvent menu, theFields menus, orBoth.

SetAction typetolink.

InURIprovide a URI for the location of the external resource that you want to send your field values to.

Similar to theLabelsetting, when you declare the value of a field, you use the name of the field enclosed by dollar signs.

Variables passed in GET actions via URIs are automaticallyURL encodedduring transmission. This means you can include values that have spaces between words or punctuation characters.

UnderOpen link in, determine whether the workflow action displays in the current window or if it opens the link in a new window.

Set theLink methodtoget.

ClickSaveto save your workflow action definition.


Question 613

When should you use the transaction command instead of the scats command?



Answer : D

The transaction command is used to group events into transactions based on some common characteristics, such as fields, time, or both. The transaction command can also specify start and end constraints for the transactions, such as a field value that indicates the beginning or the end of a transaction. The stats command is used to calculate summary statistics on the events, such as count, sum, average, etc. The stats command cannot group events based on start and end constraints, but only on fields or time buckets. Therefore, the transaction command should be used instead of the stats command when you need to group events based on start and end constraints.


Question 614
Question 615

How do event types help a user search their data?



Answer : D

Event types allow users to assign labels to events based on predefined search strings. This helps categorize data and makes it easier to reference specific sets of events in future searches.


Splunk Docs - Event types

Question 616
Question 617

If there are fields in the data with values that are " " or empty but not null, which of the following would add a value?



Answer : D

The correct answer is D. | eval notNULL = '''' fillnull value=0 notNULL

Option A is incorrect because it is missing a comma between the ''0'' and the notNULL in the if function. The correct syntax for the if function is if (condition, true_value, false_value).

Option B is incorrect because it is missing the false_value argument in the if function. The correct syntax for the if function is if (condition, true_value, false_value).

Option C is incorrect because it uses the nullfill command, which only replaces null values, not empty strings. The nullfill command is equivalent to fillnull value=null.

Option D is correct because it uses the eval command to assign an empty string to the notNULL field, and then uses the fillnull command to replace the empty string with a zero. The fillnull command can replace any value with a specified replacement, not just null values.


Question 618

Which of the following statements about data models and pivot are true? (select all that apply)



Answer : D

Data models and pivot are both knowledge objects in Splunk that allow you to analyze and visualize your data in different ways. Data models are collections of datasets that represent your data in a structured and hierarchical way. Data models define how your data is organized into objects and fields. Pivot is a user interface that allows you to create data visualizations that present different aspects of a data model. Pivot does not require users to input SPL searches on data models, but rather lets them select options from menus and forms. Data models are not created out of datasets called pivots, but rather pivots are created from datasets in data models.


Question 619

The eval command 'if' function requires the following three arguments (in order):



Answer : A

The eval command 'if' function requires the following three arguments (in order): boolean expression, result if true, result if false. The eval command is a search command that allows you to create new fields or modify existing fields by performing calculations or transformations on them. The eval command can use various functions to perform different operations on fields. The 'if' function is one of the functions that can be used with the eval command to perform conditional evaluations on fields. The 'if' function takes three arguments: a boolean expression that evaluates to true or false, a result that will be returned if the boolean expression is true, and a result that will be returned if the boolean expression is false. The 'if' function returns one of the two results based on the evaluation of the boolean expression.


Question 620

Which of the following is true about the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM)?



Answer : D

The Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) is an app that contains a set of predefined data models that apply a common structure and naming convention to data from any source. The CIM enables you to use data from different sources in a consistent and coherent way. The CIM contains 28 pre-configured datasets that cover various domains such as authentication, network traffic, web, email, etc. The data models included in the CIM are configured with data model acceleration turned on by default, which means that they are optimized for faster searches and analysis. Data model acceleration creates and maintains summary data for the data models, which reduces the amount of raw data that needs to be scanned when you run a search using a data model.

: Splunk Core Certified Power User Track, page 10. : Splunk Documentation, About the Splunk Common Information Model.


Question 621

Which command is used to create choropleth maps?



Answer : C


Question 622

Calculated fields can be based on which of the following?



Answer : B

'Calculated fields can reference all types of field extractions and field aliasing, but they cannot reference lookups, event types, or tags.'


Question 623

Which of the following searches would return a report of sales by product-name?



Question 624

Which of the following statements describes macros?



Answer : C


A macro is a reusable search string that can contain any part of a search, such as search terms, commands, arguments, etc. A macro can have a flexible time range that can be specified when the macro is executed. A macro can also have arguments that can be passed to the macro when it is executed. A macro can be created by using the Settings menu or by editing the macros.conf file. A macro does not have to contain the full search, but only the part that needs to be reused. A macro does not have to have a fixed time range, but can use a relative or absolute time range modifier. A macro does not have to contain only a portion of the search, but can contain multiple parts of the search.

Question 625
Question 626

When would a user select delimited field extractions using the Field Extractor (FX)?



Answer : A

The correct answer is A. When a log file has values that are separated by the same character, for example, commas.

The Field Extractor (FX) is a utility in Splunk Web that allows you to create new fields from your events by using either regular expressions or delimiters. The FX provides a graphical interface that guides you through the steps of defining and testing your field extractions1.

The FX supports two field extraction methods: regular expression and delimited. The regular expression method works best with unstructured event data, such as logs or messages, that do not have a consistent format or structure. You select a sample event and highlight one or more fields to extract from that event, and the FX generates a regular expression that matches similar events in your data set and extracts the fields from them1.

The delimited method is designed for structured event data: data from files with headers, where all of the fields in the events are separated by a common delimiter, such as a comma, a tab, or a space. You select a sample event, identify the delimiter, and then rename the fields that the FX finds1.

Therefore, you would select the delimited field extraction method when you have a log file that has values that are separated by the same character, for example, commas. This method will allow you to easily extract the fields based on the delimiter without writing complex regular expressions.

The other options are not correct because they are not suitable for the delimited field extraction method. These options are:

B) When a log file contains empty lines or comments: This option does not indicate that the log file has a structured format or a common delimiter. The delimited method might not work well with this type of data, as it might miss some fields or include some unwanted values.

C) With structured files such as JSON or XML: This option does not require the delimited method, as Splunk can automatically extract fields from JSON or XML files by using indexed extractions or search-time extractions2. The delimited method might not work well with this type of data, as it might not recognize the nested structure or the special characters.

D) When the file has a header that might provide information about its structure or format: This option does not indicate that the file has a common delimiter between the fields. The delimited method might not work well with this type of data, as it might not be able to identify the fields based on the header information.


Build field extractions with the field extractor

Configure indexed field extraction

Question 627

Based on the macro definition shown below, what is the correct way to execute the macro in a search string?



Answer : B


The correct way to execute the macro in a search string is to use the formatmacro_name($arg1$, $arg2$, ...)where$arg1$,$arg2$, etc. are the arguments for the macro. In this case, the macro name isconvert_salesand it takes three arguments:currency,symbol, andrate. The arguments are enclosed in dollar signs and separated by commas. Therefore, the correct way to execute the macro isconvert_sales($euro$, $$, .79).

Question 628

When extracting fields, we may choose to use our own regular expressions



Answer : A


Question 629
Question 630

There are several ways to access the field extractor. Which option automatically identifies data type, source type, and sample event?



Answer : B

There are several ways to access the field extractor. The option that automatically identifies data type, source type, and sample event is Fields sidebar > Extract New Field. The field extractor is a tool that helps you extract fields from your data using delimiters or regular expressions. The field extractor can generate a regex for you based on your selection of sample values or you can enter your own regex in the field extractor. The field extractor can be accessed by using various methods, such as:

Fields sidebar > Extract New Field: This is the easiest way to access the field extractor. The fields sidebar is a panel that shows all available fields for your data and their values. When you click on Extract New Field in the fields sidebar, Splunk will automatically identify the data type, source type, and sample event for your data based on your current search criteria. You can then use the field extractor to select sample values and generate a regex for your new field.

Event Actions > Extract Fields: This is another way to access the field extractor. Event actions are actions that you can perform on individual events in your search results, such as viewing event details, adding to report, adding to dashboard, etc. When you click on Extract Fields in the event actions menu, Splunk will use the current event as the sample event for your data and ask you to select the source type and data type for your data. You can then use the field extractor to select sample values and generate a regex for your new field.

Settings > Field Extractions > New Field Extraction: This is a more advanced way to access the field extractor. Settings is a menu that allows you to configure various aspects of Splunk, such as indexes, inputs, outputs, users, roles, apps, etc. When you click on New Field Extraction in the Settings menu, Splunk will ask you to enter all the details for your new field extraction manually, such as app context, name, source type, data type, sample event, regex, etc. You can then use the field extractor to verify or modify your regex for your new field.


Question 631

Complete the search, .... | _____ failure>successes



Answer : B

The where command can be used to complete the search below.

... | where failure>successes

The where command is a search command that allows you to filter events based on complex or custom criteri

a. The where command can use any boolean expression or function to evaluate each event and determine whether to keep it or discard it. The where command can also compare fields or perform calculations on fields using operators such as >, <, =, +, -, etc. The where command can be used after any transforming command that creates a table or a chart.

The search string below does the following:

It uses ... to represent any search criteria or commands before the where command.

It uses the where command to filter events based on a comparison between two fields: failure and successes.

It uses the greater than operator (>) to compare the values of failure and successes fields for each event.

It only keeps events where failure is greater than successes.


Question 632

Which of the following statements is true about the root dataset of a data model?



Answer : B

In Splunk, a data model's root dataset is the foundational element upon which the rest of the data model is built. The root dataset can be of various types, including search, transaction, or event-based datasets. One of the key features of the root dataset is that it automatically inherits the knowledge objects associated with its base search. These knowledge objects include field extractions, lookups, aliases, and calculated fields that are defined for the base search, ensuring that the root dataset has all necessary contextual information from the outset. This allows users to build upon this dataset with additional child datasets and objects without having to redefine the base search's knowledge objects.


Question 633

Which statement is true?



Answer : C

The statement that pivot is used for creating reports and dashboards is true. Pivot is a graphical interface that allows you to create tables, charts, and visualizations from data models. Data models are structured datasets that define how data is organized and categorized. Pivot does not create datasets, but uses existing ones.


Question 634
Question 635

Which of the following Statements about macros is true? (select all that apply)



Question 636

It is mandatory for the lookup file to have this for an automatic lookup to work.



Answer : D


Question 637
Question 638

What are the expected results for a search that contains the command | where A=B?



Answer : C

The correct answer is C. Events where values of field A are equal to values of field B.

The where command is used to filter the search results based on an expression that evaluates to true or false. The where command can compare two fields, two values, or a field and a value. The where command can also use functions, operators, and wildcards to create complex expressions1.

The syntax for the where command is:

| where <expression>

The expression can be a comparison, a calculation, a logical operation, or a combination of these. The expression must evaluate to true or false for each event.

To compare two fields with the where command, you need to use the field names without any quotation marks. For example, if you want to find events where the values for the field A match the values for the field B, you can use the following syntax:

| where A=B

This will return only the events where the two fields have the same value.

The other options are not correct because they use different syntax or fields that are not related to the where command. These options are:

A) Events that contain the string value where A=B: This option uses the string value where A=B as a search term, which is not valid syntax for the where command. This option will return events that have the literal text ''where A=B'' in them.

B) Events that contain the string value A=B: This option uses the string value A=B as a search term, which is not valid syntax for the where command. This option will return events that have the literal text ''A=B'' in them.

D) Events where field A contains the string value B: This option uses quotation marks around the value B, which is not valid syntax for comparing fields with the where command. Quotation marks are used to enclose phrases or exact matches in a search2. This option will return events where the field A contains the string value ''B''.


where command usage

Search command cheatsheet

Question 639
Question 640
Question 641

Which of the following file formats can be extracted using a delimiter field extraction?



Answer : A

A delimiter field extraction is a method of extracting fields from data that uses a character or a string to separate fields in each event. A delimiter field extraction can be performed by using the Field Extractor (FX) tool or by editing the props.conf file. A delimiter field extraction can be applied to any file format that uses a delimiter to separate fields, such as CSV, TSV, PSV, etc. A CSV file is a comma-separated values file that uses commas as delimiters. Therefore, a CSV file can be extracted using a delimiter field extraction.


Question 642

The macro weekly sales (2) contains the search string:

index=games | eval ProductSales = $Price$ * $AmountSold$

Which of the following will return results?



Answer : C

To use a search macro in a search string, you need to place a back tick character (`) before and after the macro name1. You also need to use the same number of arguments as defined in the macro2. The macro weekly sales (2) has two arguments: Price and AmountSold. Therefore, you need to provide two values for these arguments when you call the macro.

The option A is incorrect because it uses parentheses instead of back ticks around the macro name. The option B is incorrect because it uses underscores instead of spaces in the macro name. The option D is incorrect because it uses spaces instead of commas to separate the argument values.


Question 643

Calculated fields can be based on which of the following?



Answer : B

'Calculated fields can reference all types of field extractions and field aliasing, but they cannot reference lookups, event types, or tags.'


Question 644

What is needed to define a calculated field?



Answer : A

A calculated field in Splunk is created using an eval expression, which allows users to perform calculations or transformations on field values during search time.


Splunk Docs - Calculated fields

Question 645
Question 646

When using | timechart by host, which field is represented in the x-axis?



Answer : D


Question 647

Use the dedup command to _____.



Answer : B


Question 648
Question 649
Question 650

Which of the following describes this search?

New Search

'third_party_outages(EMEA,-24h)'



Question 651
Question 652

When using timechart, how many fields can be listed after a by clause?



Question 653

Using the Field Extractor (FX) tool, a value is highlighted to extract and give a name to a new field. Splunk has not successfully extracted that value from all appropriate events. What steps can be taken so Splunk successfully extracts the value from all appropriate events? (select all that apply)



Answer : A, D

When using the Field Extractor (FX) tool in Splunk and the tool fails to extract a value from all appropriate events, there are specific steps you can take to improve the extraction process. These steps involve interacting with the FX tool and possibly adjusting the extraction method:

A . Select an additional sample event with the Field Extractor (FX) and highlight the missing value in the event. This approach allows Splunk to understand the pattern better by providing more examples. By highlighting the value in another event where it wasn't extracted, you help the FX tool to learn the variability in the data format or structure, improving the accuracy of the field extraction.

D . Edit the regular expression manually. Sometimes the FX tool might not generate the most accurate regular expression for the field extraction, especially when dealing with complex log formats or subtle nuances in the data. In such cases, manually editing the regular expression can significantly improve the extraction process. This involves understanding regular expression syntax and how Splunk extracts fields, allowing for a more tailored approach to field extraction that accounts for variations in the data that the automatic process might miss.

Options B and C are not typically related to improving field extraction within the Field Extractor tool. Re-ingesting data (B) does not directly impact the extraction process, and changing to a delimited extraction method (C) is not always applicable, as it depends on the specific data format and might not resolve the issue of missing values across events.


Question 654

There are several ways to access the field extractor. Which option automatically identifies data type, source type, and sample event?



Answer : B

There are several ways to access the field extractor. The option that automatically identifies data type, source type, and sample event is Fields sidebar > Extract New Field. The field extractor is a tool that helps you extract fields from your data using delimiters or regular expressions. The field extractor can generate a regex for you based on your selection of sample values or you can enter your own regex in the field extractor. The field extractor can be accessed by using various methods, such as:

Fields sidebar > Extract New Field: This is the easiest way to access the field extractor. The fields sidebar is a panel that shows all available fields for your data and their values. When you click on Extract New Field in the fields sidebar, Splunk will automatically identify the data type, source type, and sample event for your data based on your current search criteria. You can then use the field extractor to select sample values and generate a regex for your new field.

Event Actions > Extract Fields: This is another way to access the field extractor. Event actions are actions that you can perform on individual events in your search results, such as viewing event details, adding to report, adding to dashboard, etc. When you click on Extract Fields in the event actions menu, Splunk will use the current event as the sample event for your data and ask you to select the source type and data type for your data. You can then use the field extractor to select sample values and generate a regex for your new field.

Settings > Field Extractions > New Field Extraction: This is a more advanced way to access the field extractor. Settings is a menu that allows you to configure various aspects of Splunk, such as indexes, inputs, outputs, users, roles, apps, etc. When you click on New Field Extraction in the Settings menu, Splunk will ask you to enter all the details for your new field extraction manually, such as app context, name, source type, data type, sample event, regex, etc. You can then use the field extractor to verify or modify your regex for your new field.


Question 655

Which of the following statements best describes a macro?



Answer : C

The correct answer is C. A macro is a portion of a search that can be reused in multiple places.

A macro is a way to reuse a piece of SPL code in different searches. A macro can be any part of a search, such as an eval statement or a search term, and does not need to be a complete command. A macro can also take arguments, which are variables that can be replaced by different values when the macro is called. A macro can also contain another macro within it, which is called a nested macro1.

To create a macro, you need to define its name, definition, arguments, and description in the Settings > Advanced Search > Search Macros page in Splunk Web or in the macros.conf file. To use a macro in a search, you need to enclose the macro name in backtick characters (`) and provide values for the arguments if any1.

For example, if you have a macro named my_macro that takes one argument named object and has the following definition:

search sourcetype= object

You can use it in a search by writing:

my_macro(web)

This will expand the macro and run the following SPL code:

search sourcetype=web

The benefits of using macros are that they can simplify complex searches, reduce errors, improve readability, and promote consistency1.

The other options are not correct because they describe other types of knowledge objects in Splunk, not macros. These objects are:

A) An event type is a method of categorizing events based on a search. An event type assigns a label to events that match a specific search criteria. Event types can be used to filter and group events, create alerts, or generate reports2.

B) A field alias is a way to associate an additional (new) name with an existing field name. A field alias can be used to normalize fields from different sources that have different names but represent the same data. Field aliases can also be used to rename fields for clarity or convenience3.

D) An alert is a knowledge object that enables you to schedule searches for specific events and trigger actions when certain conditions are met. An alert can be used to monitor your data for anomalies, errors, or other patterns of interest and notify you or others when they occur4.


About event types

About field aliases

About alerts

Define search macros in Settings

Use search macros in searches

Question 656

Which function should you use with the transaction command to set the maximum total time between the earliest and latest events returned?



Answer : D

The maxspan function of the transaction command allows you to set the maximum total time between the earliest and latest events returned. The maxspan function is an argument that can be used with the transaction command to specify the start and end constraints for the transactions. The maxspan function takes a time modifier as its value, such as 30s, 5m, 1h, etc. The maxspan function sets the maximum time span between the first and last events in a transaction. If the time span between the first and last events exceeds the maxspan value, the transaction will be split into multiple transactions.


Question 657

The stats command will create a _____________ by default.



Answer : A


Question 658
Question 659

Two separate results tables are being combined using the join command. The outer table has the following values:

The inner table has the following values:

The line of SPL used to join the tables is: join employeeNumber type=outer

How many rows are returned in the new table?



Answer : C

In this case, the outer join is applied, which means that all rows from the outer (left) table will be included, even if there are no matching rows in the inner (right) table. The result will include all five rows from the outer table, with the matched data from the inner table where employeeNumber matches. Rows without matching employeeNumber values will have null values for the fields from the inner table.


Splunk Documentation - Join Command

Question 660

What are the expected results for a search that contains the command | where A=B?



Answer : C

The correct answer is C. Events where values of field A are equal to values of field B.

The where command is used to filter the search results based on an expression that evaluates to true or false. The where command can compare two fields, two values, or a field and a value. The where command can also use functions, operators, and wildcards to create complex expressions1.

The syntax for the where command is:

| where <expression>

The expression can be a comparison, a calculation, a logical operation, or a combination of these. The expression must evaluate to true or false for each event.

To compare two fields with the where command, you need to use the field names without any quotation marks. For example, if you want to find events where the values for the field A match the values for the field B, you can use the following syntax:

| where A=B

This will return only the events where the two fields have the same value.

The other options are not correct because they use different syntax or fields that are not related to the where command. These options are:

A) Events that contain the string value where A=B: This option uses the string value where A=B as a search term, which is not valid syntax for the where command. This option will return events that have the literal text ''where A=B'' in them.

B) Events that contain the string value A=B: This option uses the string value A=B as a search term, which is not valid syntax for the where command. This option will return events that have the literal text ''A=B'' in them.

D) Events where field A contains the string value B: This option uses quotation marks around the value B, which is not valid syntax for comparing fields with the where command. Quotation marks are used to enclose phrases or exact matches in a search2. This option will return events where the field A contains the string value ''B''.


where command usage

Search command cheatsheet

Question 661

Which of the following statements about calculated fields in Splunk is true?



Answer : B

The correct answer is B. Calculated fields can be chained together to create more complex fields.

Calculated fields are fields that are added to events at search time by using eval expressions. They can be used to perform calculations with the values of two or more fields already present in those events. Calculated fields can be defined with Splunk Web or in the props.conf file. They can be used in searches, reports, dashboards, and data models like any other extracted field1.

Calculated fields can also be chained together to create more complex fields. This means that you can use a calculated field as an input for another calculated field. For example, if you have a calculated field named total that sums up the values of two fields named price and tax, you can use the total field to create another calculated field named discount that applies a percentage discount to the total field. To do this, you need to define the discount field with an eval expression that references the total field, such as:

discount = total * 0.9

This will create a new field named discount that is equal to 90% of the total field value for each event2.


About calculated fields

Chaining calculated fields

Question 662

By default, how is acceleration configured in the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) add-on?



Answer : D

By default, acceleration is determined automatically based on the data source in the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) add-on. The Splunk CIM Add-on is an app that provides common data models for various domains, such as network traffic, web activity, authentication, etc. The CIM Add-on allows you to normalize and enrich your data using predefined fields and tags. The CIM Add-on also allows you to accelerate your data models for faster searches and reports. Acceleration is a feature that pre-computes summary data for your data models and stores them in tsidx files. Acceleration can improve the performance and efficiency of your searches and reports that use data models.

By default, acceleration is determined automatically based on the data source in the CIM Add-on. This means that Splunk will decide whether to enable or disable acceleration for each data model based on some factors, such as data volume, data type, data model complexity, etc. However, you can also manually enable or disable acceleration for each data model by using the Settings menu or by editing the datamodels.conf file.


Question 663

Which of the following searches would return a report of sales by product-name?



Question 664

When creating an event type, which is allowed in the search string?



Answer : C

When creating an event type in Splunk, subsearches are allowed in the search string. Subsearches enable users to perform a secondary search whose results are used as input for the main search. This functionality is useful for more complex event type definitions that require additional filtering or criteria based on another search.


Splunk Docs: About subsearches

Splunk Docs: Event type creation

Splunk Answers: Using subsearches in event types

Question 665

This clause is used to group the output of a stats command by a specific name.



Answer : B


Question 666

When using timechart, how many fields can be listed after a by clause?



Question 667

Which command is used to create choropleth maps?



Answer : C


Question 668
Question 669
Question 670
Question 671

The stats command will create a _____________ by default.



Answer : A


Question 672

For the following search, which field populates the x-axis?

index=security sourcetype=linux secure | timechart count by action



Question 673
Question 674
Question 675
Question 676

Which of the following can a field alias be applied to?



Answer : C

Field aliases in Splunk are used to map field names in event data to alternate names to make them easier to understand or consistent across datasets.

Option A (Tags): Field aliases are not directly applied to tags. Tags are used for categorizing events or field values.

Option B (Indexes): Field aliases cannot be applied to indexes. Indexes are physical storage locations for events in Splunk.

Option C (Sourcetypes): This is correct. Field aliases can be defined at the sourcetype level to ensure consistent naming across events of the same sourcetype.

Option D (Event types): Event types are saved searches, and field aliases do not apply here directly.


Splunk Docs: Field Aliases

Question 677

Which command can include both an over and a by clause to divide results into sub-groupings?



Answer : A


Question 678

What is required for a macro to accept three arguments?



Question 679
Question 680

What is the correct syntax to find events associated with a tag?



Answer : D

The correct syntax to find events associated with a tag in Splunk is tag=<value>1. So, the correct answer is D) tag=<value>. This syntax allows you to annotate specified fields in your search results with tags1.

In Splunk, tags are a type of knowledge object that you can use to add meaningful aliases to field values in your data1. For example, if you have a field called status_code in your data, you might have different status codes like 200, 404, 500, etc. You can create tags for these status codes like success for 200, not_found for 404, and server_error for 500. Then, you can use the tag command in your searches to find events associated with these tags1.

Here is an example of how you can use the tag command in a search:

index=main sourcetype=access_combined | tag status_code

In this search, the tag command annotates the status_code field in the search results with the corresponding tags. If you have tagged the status code 200 with success, the status code 404 with not_found, and the status code 500 with server_error, the search results will include these tags1.

You can also use the tag command with a specific tag value to find events associated with that tag. For example, the following search finds all events where the status code is tagged with success:

index=main sourcetype=access_combined | tag status_code | search tag::status_code=success

In this search, the tag command annotates the status_code field with the corresponding tags, and the search command filters the results to include only events where the status_code field is tagged with success1.


Question 681

Which of the following can be used with the eval command tostring function (select all that apply)



Answer : A, B, D

https://docs.splunk.com/Documentation/Splunk/8.1.0/SearchReference/ConversionFunctions#tostring.28X.2CY.29

The tostring function in the eval command converts a numeric value to a string value. It can take an optional second argument that specifies the format of the string value. Some of the possible formats are:

hex: converts the numeric value to a hexadecimal string.

commas: adds commas to separate thousands in the numeric value.

duration: converts the numeric value to a human-readable duration string, such as ''2h 3m 4s''.

Therefore, the formats A, B, and D can be used with the tostring function.


Question 682

When is a GET workflow action needed?



Answer : B


Question 683

When performing a regex field extraction with the Field Extractor (FX), a data type must be chosen before a sample event can be selected. Which of the following data types are supported?



Answer : D

When using the Field Extractor (FX) in Splunk for regex field extraction, it's important to select the context in which you want to perform the extraction. The context is essentially the subset of data you're focusing on for your field extraction task.

D . Sourcetype or source: This is the correct option. In the initial steps of using the Field Extractor tool, you're prompted to choose a data type for your field extraction. The options available are typically based on the nature of your data and how it's organized in Splunk. 'Sourcetype' refers to the kind of data you're dealing with, a categorization that helps Splunk apply specific processing rules. 'Source' refers to the origin of the data, like a specific log file or data input. By selecting either a sourcetype or source, you're narrowing down the dataset on which you'll perform the regex extraction, making it more manageable and relevant.


Question 684

Brad created a tag called "SpecialProjectX". It is associated with several field/value pairs, such as team=support, location=Austin, and release=Fuji. What search should Brad run to filter results for SpecialProjectX events related to the Support Team?



Answer : B

Tags in Splunk allow users to assign multiple field-value pairs to a common label.

The correct syntax to filter by tag is tag::<field>=<tag_name>.

tag::team=SpecialProjectX will filter results where team=support is associated with the tag SpecialProjectX.

tag=SpecialProjectX searches for all events associated with SpecialProjectX, not just the support team.

tag::Support-SpecialProjectX is incorrect syntax.

tag!=Fuji,Austin is incorrect since it does not filter using the SpecialProjectX tag.

Reference: Splunk Docs - Tags


Question 685

How many ways are there to access the Field Extractor Utility?



Answer : A


Question 686

Which command is used to create choropleth maps?



Answer : C


Question 687

Use the dedup command to _____.



Answer : B


Question 688

Consider the following search:

index=web sourcetype=access_corabined

The log shows several events that share the same jsesszonid value (SD462K101O2F267). View the events as a group.

From the following list, which search groups events by jSSESSIONID?



Question 689

What other syntax will produce exactly the same results as | chart count over vendor_action by user?



Question 690

It is mandatory for the lookup file to have this for an automatic lookup to work.



Answer : D


Question 691

A user wants to create a workflow action that will retrieve a specific field value from an event and run a search in a new browser window

in the user's Splunk instance. What kind of workflow action should they create?



Answer : B

A Search workflow action is the appropriate choice when a user wants to retrieve a specific field value from an event and run a search in a new browser window within their Splunk instance (Option B). This type of workflow action allows users to define a search that utilizes field values from selected events as parameters, enabling more detailed investigation or context-specific analysis based on the original search results.


Question 692
Question 693
Question 694
Question 695

Which of the following is one of the pre-configured data models included in the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) add-on?



Answer : D


Question 696

What is required for a macro to accept three arguments?



Question 697

A user wants to convert numeric field values to strings and also to sort on those values.

Which command should be used first, the eval or the sort?



Question 698

Which of the following describes this search?

New Search

'third_party_outages(EMEA,-24h)'



Question 699
Question 700

Which of the following statements describe the search below? (select all that apply)

Index=main I transaction clientip host maxspan=30s maxpause=5s



Answer : A, B, D

The search below groups events by two or more fields (clientip and host), creates transactions with start and end constraints (maxspan=30s and maxpause=5s), and calculates the duration of each transaction.

index=main | transaction clientip host maxspan=30s maxpause=5s

The search does the following:

It filters the events by the index main, which is a default index in Splunk that contains all data that is not sent to other indexes.

It uses the transaction command to group events into transactions based on two fields: clientip and host. The transaction command creates new events from groups of events that share the same clientip and host values.

It specifies the start and end constraints for the transactions using the maxspan and maxpause arguments. The maxspan argument sets the maximum time span between the first and last events in a transaction. The maxpause argument sets the maximum time span between any two consecutive events in a transaction. In this case, the maxspan is 30 seconds and the maxpause is 5 seconds, meaning that any transaction that has a longer time span or pause will be split into multiple transactions.

It creates some additional fields for each transaction, such as duration, eventcount, startime, etc. The duration field shows the time span between the first and last events in a transaction.


Question 701

Which of the following statements best describes a macro?



Answer : C

The correct answer is C. A macro is a portion of a search that can be reused in multiple places.

A macro is a way to reuse a piece of SPL code in different searches. A macro can be any part of a search, such as an eval statement or a search term, and does not need to be a complete command. A macro can also take arguments, which are variables that can be replaced by different values when the macro is called. A macro can also contain another macro within it, which is called a nested macro1.

To create a macro, you need to define its name, definition, arguments, and description in the Settings > Advanced Search > Search Macros page in Splunk Web or in the macros.conf file. To use a macro in a search, you need to enclose the macro name in backtick characters (`) and provide values for the arguments if any1.

For example, if you have a macro named my_macro that takes one argument named object and has the following definition:

search sourcetype= object

You can use it in a search by writing:

my_macro(web)

This will expand the macro and run the following SPL code:

search sourcetype=web

The benefits of using macros are that they can simplify complex searches, reduce errors, improve readability, and promote consistency1.

The other options are not correct because they describe other types of knowledge objects in Splunk, not macros. These objects are:

A) An event type is a method of categorizing events based on a search. An event type assigns a label to events that match a specific search criteria. Event types can be used to filter and group events, create alerts, or generate reports2.

B) A field alias is a way to associate an additional (new) name with an existing field name. A field alias can be used to normalize fields from different sources that have different names but represent the same data. Field aliases can also be used to rename fields for clarity or convenience3.

D) An alert is a knowledge object that enables you to schedule searches for specific events and trigger actions when certain conditions are met. An alert can be used to monitor your data for anomalies, errors, or other patterns of interest and notify you or others when they occur4.


About event types

About field aliases

About alerts

Define search macros in Settings

Use search macros in searches

Question 702

When does the CIM add-on apply preconfigured data models to the data?



Answer : A

The Common Information Model (CIM) add-on in Splunk applies preconfigured data models to data at search time. This means that when a search is executed, the CIM add-on uses its predefined data models to normalize and map the relevant data to a common format. This approach ensures that data is interpreted and analyzed consistently across various datasets without modifying the data at index time.


Splunk Docs: About the Common Information Model

Splunk Answers: CIM Add-on Data Models

Question 703

Which statement is true?



Answer : C


Pivot is used for creating reports and dashboards. Pivot is a tool that allows you to create reports and dashboards from your data models without writing any SPL commands. Pivot can help you visualize and analyze your data using various options, such as filters, rows, columns, cells, charts, tables, maps, etc. Pivot can also help you accelerate your reports and dashboards by using summary data from your accelerated data models.

Pivot is not used for creating datasets or data models. Datasets are collections of events that represent your data in a structured and hierarchical way. Data models are predefined datasets for various domains, such as network traffic, web activity, authentication, etc. Datasets and data models can be created by using commands such as datamodel or pivot.

Question 704

Which of the following statements is true, especially in large environments?



Answer : B


The stats command is faster and more efficient than the transaction command, especially in large environments. The stats command is used to calculate summary statistics on the events, such as count, sum, average, etc. The stats command can group events by one or more fields or by time buckets. The stats command does not create new events from groups of events, but rather creates new fields with statistical values. The transaction command is used to group events into transactions based on some common characteristics, such as fields, time, or both. The transaction command creates new events from groups of events that share one or more fields. The transaction command also creates some additional fields for each transaction, such as duration, eventcount, startime, etc. The transaction command is slower and more resource-intensive than the stats command because it has to process more data and create more events and fields.

Question 705

These allow you to categorize events based on search terms.

Select your answer.



Answer : B


Question 706

Which of the following describes the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) add-on?



Answer : C

The Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) add-on is a Splunk app that contains data models to help you normalize data from different sources and formats. The CIM add-on defines a common and consistent way of naming and categorizing fields and events in Splunk. This makes it easier to correlate and analyze data across different domains, such as network, security, web, etc. The CIM add-on does not use machine learning to normalize data, but rather relies on predefined field names and values. The CIM add-on does not contain dashboards that show how to map data, but rather provides documentation and examples on how to use the data models. The CIM add-on is not automatically installed in a Splunk environment, but rather needs to be downloaded and installed from Splunkbase.


Question 707

Which of the following statements describe GET workflow actions?



Answer : D

GET workflow actions are custom actions that open a URL link when you click on a field value in your search results. GET workflow actions can be configured with various options, such as label name, base URL, URI parameters, app context, etc. One of the options is to choose whether to open the URL link in the current window or in a new window. GET workflow actions do not have to be configured with POST arguments, as they use GET method to send requests to web servers. Configuration of GET workflow actions does not include choosing a sourcetype, as they do not generate any data in Splunk. Label names for GET workflow actions must include a field name surrounded by dollar signs, as this indicates the field value that will be used to replace the variable in the URL link.


Question 708

Which of the following statements describe the search string below?

| datamodel Application_State All_Application_State search



Answer : B

The search string below returns events from the data model named Application_State.

| datamodel Application_State All_Application_State search

The search string does the following:

It uses the datamodel command to access a data model in Splunk. The datamodel command takes two arguments: the name of the data model and the name of the dataset within the data model.

It specifies the name of the data model as Application_State. This is a predefined data model in Splunk that contains information about web applications.

It specifies the name of the dataset as All_Application_State. This is a root dataset in the data model that contains all events from all child datasets.

It uses the search command to filter and transform the events from the dataset. The search command can use any search criteria or command to modify the results.

Therefore, the search string returns events from the data model named Application_State.


Question 709
Question 710

Which of the following knowledge objects can reference field aliases?



Answer : A

Field aliases in Splunk are alternate names assigned to fields. These can be particularly useful for normalizing data from different sources or simply for making field names more intuitive. Once an alias is created for a field, it can be used across various Splunk knowledge objects, enhancing their flexibility and utility.

A . Calculated fields, lookups, event types, and tags: This is the correct answer. Field aliases can indeed be referenced in calculated fields, lookups, event types, and tags within Splunk. When you create an alias for a field, that alias can then be used in these knowledge objects just like any standard field name.

Calculated fields: These are expressions that can create new field values based on existing data. You can use an alias in a calculated field expression to refer to the original field.

Lookups: These are used to enrich your event data by referencing external data sources. If you've created an alias for a field that matches a field in your lookup table, you can use that alias in your lookup configurations.

Event types: These are classifications for events that meet certain search criteria. You can use field aliases in the search criteria for defining an event type.

Tags: These allow you to assign meaningful labels to data, making it easier to search and report on. You can use field aliases in the search criteria that you tag.


Question 711
Question 712
Question 713

What is a limitation of searches generated by workflow actions?



Answer : D


Question 714
Question 715

Which statement is true?



Answer : C

The statement that pivot is used for creating reports and dashboards is true. Pivot is a graphical interface that allows you to create tables, charts, and visualizations from data models. Data models are structured datasets that define how data is organized and categorized. Pivot does not create datasets, but uses existing ones.


Question 716
Question 717

When using | timchart by host, which filed is representted in the x-axis?



Answer : A


Question 718

When using | timechart by host, which field is represented in the x-axis?



Answer : D


Question 719

Based on the macro definition shown below, what is the correct way to execute the macro in a search string?



Answer : B


The correct way to execute the macro in a search string is to use the formatmacro_name($arg1$, $arg2$, ...)where$arg1$,$arg2$, etc. are the arguments for the macro. In this case, the macro name isconvert_salesand it takes three arguments:currency,symbol, andrate. The arguments are enclosed in dollar signs and separated by commas. Therefore, the correct way to execute the macro isconvert_sales($euro$, $$, .79).

Question 720

Which workflow uses field values to perform a secondary search?



Question 721
Question 722

What does the fillnull command replace null values with, if the value argument is not specified?



Answer : A

The fillnull command replaces null values with 0 by default, if the value argument is not specified. You can use the value argument to specify a different value to replace null values with, such as N/A or NULL.


Question 723

Which of the following data models are included in the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) add-on? (select all that apply)



Answer : B, D

The Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) Add-on includes a variety of data models designed to normalize data from different sources to allow for cross-source reporting and analysis. Among the data models included, Alerts (Option B) and Email (Option D) are part of the CIM. The Alerts data model is used for data related to alerts and incidents, while the Email data model is used for data pertaining to email messages and transactions. User permissions (Option A) and Databases (Option C) are not data models included in the CIM; rather, they pertain to aspects of data access control and specific types of data sources, respectively, which are outside the scope of the CIM's predefined data models.


Question 724

What is the correct way to name a macro with two arguments?



Answer : D


Question 725

When using timechart, how many fields can be listed after a by clause?



Question 726
Question 727

Which of the following statements about data models and pivot are true? (select all that apply)



Answer : D

Data models and pivot are both knowledge objects in Splunk that allow you to analyze and visualize your data in different ways. Data models are collections of datasets that represent your data in a structured and hierarchical way. Data models define how your data is organized into objects and fields. Pivot is a user interface that allows you to create data visualizations that present different aspects of a data model. Pivot does not require users to input SPL searches on data models, but rather lets them select options from menus and forms. Data models are not created out of datasets called pivots, but rather pivots are created from datasets in data models.


Question 728

When using | timchart by host, which filed is representted in the x-axis?



Answer : A


Question 729

Which of the following is one of the pre-configured data models included in the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) add-on?



Answer : D


Question 730
Question 731
Question 732
Question 733

This is what Splunk uses to categorize the data that is being indexed.



Answer : A


Question 734

Which of the following statements describe GET workflow actions?



Answer : D

GET workflow actions are custom actions that open a URL link when you click on a field value in your search results. GET workflow actions can be configured with various options, such as label name, base URL, URI parameters, app context, etc. One of the options is to choose whether to open the URL link in the current window or in a new window. GET workflow actions do not have to be configured with POST arguments, as they use GET method to send requests to web servers. Configuration of GET workflow actions does not include choosing a sourcetype, as they do not generate any data in Splunk. Label names for GET workflow actions must include a field name surrounded by dollar signs, as this indicates the field value that will be used to replace the variable in the URL link.


Question 735

Using the Field Extractor (FX) tool, a value is highlighted to extract and give a name to a new field. Splunk has not successfully extracted that value from all appropriate events. What steps can be taken so Splunk successfully extracts the value from all appropriate events? (select all that apply)



Answer : A, D

When using the Field Extractor (FX) tool in Splunk and the tool fails to extract a value from all appropriate events, there are specific steps you can take to improve the extraction process. These steps involve interacting with the FX tool and possibly adjusting the extraction method:

A . Select an additional sample event with the Field Extractor (FX) and highlight the missing value in the event. This approach allows Splunk to understand the pattern better by providing more examples. By highlighting the value in another event where it wasn't extracted, you help the FX tool to learn the variability in the data format or structure, improving the accuracy of the field extraction.

D . Edit the regular expression manually. Sometimes the FX tool might not generate the most accurate regular expression for the field extraction, especially when dealing with complex log formats or subtle nuances in the data. In such cases, manually editing the regular expression can significantly improve the extraction process. This involves understanding regular expression syntax and how Splunk extracts fields, allowing for a more tailored approach to field extraction that accounts for variations in the data that the automatic process might miss.

Options B and C are not typically related to improving field extraction within the Field Extractor tool. Re-ingesting data (B) does not directly impact the extraction process, and changing to a delimited extraction method (C) is not always applicable, as it depends on the specific data format and might not resolve the issue of missing values across events.


Question 736

To which of the following can a field alias be applied?



Answer : B

In Splunk, a field alias is used to create an alternative name for an existing field, making it easier to refer to data in a consistent manner across different searches and reports. Field aliases can be applied to both calculated fields and extracted fields. Calculated fields are those that are created using eval expressions, while extracted fields are typically those parsed from the raw data at index time or search time. This flexibility allows users to streamline their searches by using more intuitive field names without altering the underlying data. Field aliases cannot be applied to data in a lookup table, specific individual fields within a dataset, or directly to a host, source, or sourcetype.


Question 737

Which of the following statements describes field aliases?



Answer : B

Field aliases are alternative names for fields in Splunk. Field aliases can be used to normalize data across different sources and sourcetypes that have different field names for the same concept. For example, you can create a field alias for src_ip that maps to clientip, source_address, or any other field name that represents the source IP address in different sourcetypes. Field aliases can also be used in lookup file definitions to map fields in your data to fields in the lookup file. For example, you can use a field alias for src_ip to map it to ip_address in a lookup file that contains geolocation information for IP addresses. Field alias names do not replace the original field name, but rather create a copy of the field with a different name. Field alias names are case sensitive when used as part of a search, meaning that src_ip and SRC_IP are different fields.


Question 738
Question 739

What fields does the transaction command add to the raw events? (select all that apply)



Question 740

Which of the following commands support the same set of functions?



Answer : C


Question 741
Question 742

A calculated field may be based on which of the following?



Answer : D

In Splunk, calculated fields allow you to create new fields using expressions that can transform or combine the values of existing fields. Although all options provided might seem viable, when selecting only one option that is most representative of a calculated field, we typically refer to:

D . Extracted fields: Calculated fields are often based on fields that have already been extracted from your data.

Extracted fields are those that Splunk has identified and pulled out from the event data based on patterns, delimiters, or other methods such as regular expressions or automatic extractions. These fields can then be used in expressions to create calculated fields.

For example, you might have an extracted field for the time in seconds, and you want to create a calculated field for the time in minutes. You would use the extracted field in a calculation to create the new field.


Question 743

When creating an event type, which is allowed in the search string?



Answer : C

When creating an event type in Splunk, subsearches are allowed in the search string. Subsearches enable users to perform a secondary search whose results are used as input for the main search. This functionality is useful for more complex event type definitions that require additional filtering or criteria based on another search.


Splunk Docs: About subsearches

Splunk Docs: Event type creation

Splunk Answers: Using subsearches in event types

Question 744

To create a tag, which of the following conditions must be met by the user?



Question 745

What are search macros?



Question 746

The eval command allows you to do which of the following? (Choose all that apply.)



Answer : A, B, C, D


Question 747

Which of the following describes the I transaction command?



Answer : C

Thetransactioncommand is a Splunk command that finds transactions based on events that meet various constraints .

Transactions are made up of the raw text (the _raw field) of each member, the time and date fields of the earliest member, as well as the union of all other fields of each member .

Thetransactioncommand groups events together by matching one or more fields that have the same value across the events . For example,| transaction clientipwill group events that have the same value in theclientipfield.


Question 748

This function of the stats command allows you to return the middle-most value of field X.



Answer : A


Question 749
Question 750

What is a benefit of installing the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) add-on?



Answer : B

It provides users with a standardized set of field names and tags to normalize data.

The Splunk CIM add-on provides a standardized set of field names and data models, which allows users to normalize and categorize data from various sources into a common format. This helps with data interoperability and enables faster, more consistent reporting and searching across different data sources.


Splunk Documentation - Common Information Model (CIM)

Question 751

A user runs the following search:

index---X sourcetype=Y I chart count (domain) as count, sum (price) as sum by product, action usenull=f useother---f

Which of the following table headers match the order this command creates?



Question 752

Which of the following searches will return all clientip addresses that start with 108?



Answer : A


Question 753

Data model are composed of one or more of which of the following datasets? (select all that apply.)



Answer : A, B, C


Data models are collections of datasets that represent your data in a structured and hierarchical way. Data models define how your data is organized into objects and fields. Data models can be composed of one or more of the following datasets:

Events datasets: These are the base datasets that represent raw events in Splunk. Events datasets can be filtered by constraints, such as search terms, sourcetypes, indexes, etc.

Search datasets: These are derived datasets that represent the results of a search on events or other datasets. Search datasets can use any search command, such as stats, eval, rex, etc., to transform the data.

Transaction datasets: These are derived datasets that represent groups of events that are related by fields, time, or both. Transaction datasets can use the transaction command or event types with transactiontype=true to create transactions.

Question 754
Question 755

A user wants a table that will show the total revenue made for each product in each sales region. Which would be the correct SPL query to use?



Answer : B

The chart command with sum(price) by product, region will return a table where the total revenue (price) is aggregated (sum) for each product and sales region. This is the correct way to aggregate data in Splunk.


Splunk Docs - chart command

Question 756

What is the relationship between data models and pivots?



Answer : A

The relationship between data models and pivots is that data models provide the datasets for pivots. Data models are collections of datasets that represent your data in a structured and hierarchical way. Data models define how your data is organized into objects and fields. Pivots are user interfaces that allow you to create data visualizations that present different aspects of a data model. Pivots let you select options from menus and forms to create charts, tables, maps, etc., without writing any SPL code. Pivots use datasets from data models as their source of data. Pivots and data models are not the same thing, as pivots are tools for visualizing data models. Pivots do not provide datasets for data models, but rather use them as inputs.

Therefore, only statement A is true about the relationship between data models and pivots.


Question 757

Using the Field Extractor (FX) tool, a value is highlighted to extract and give a name to a new field. Splunk has not successfully extracted that value from all appropriate events. What steps can be taken so Splunk successfully extracts the value from all appropriate events? (select all that apply)



Answer : A, D

When using the Field Extractor (FX) tool in Splunk and the tool fails to extract a value from all appropriate events, there are specific steps you can take to improve the extraction process. These steps involve interacting with the FX tool and possibly adjusting the extraction method:

A . Select an additional sample event with the Field Extractor (FX) and highlight the missing value in the event. This approach allows Splunk to understand the pattern better by providing more examples. By highlighting the value in another event where it wasn't extracted, you help the FX tool to learn the variability in the data format or structure, improving the accuracy of the field extraction.

D . Edit the regular expression manually. Sometimes the FX tool might not generate the most accurate regular expression for the field extraction, especially when dealing with complex log formats or subtle nuances in the data. In such cases, manually editing the regular expression can significantly improve the extraction process. This involves understanding regular expression syntax and how Splunk extracts fields, allowing for a more tailored approach to field extraction that accounts for variations in the data that the automatic process might miss.

Options B and C are not typically related to improving field extraction within the Field Extractor tool. Re-ingesting data (B) does not directly impact the extraction process, and changing to a delimited extraction method (C) is not always applicable, as it depends on the specific data format and might not resolve the issue of missing values across events.


Question 758
Question 759

Which of the following statements is true about the root dataset of a data model?



Answer : B

In Splunk, a data model's root dataset is the foundational element upon which the rest of the data model is built. The root dataset can be of various types, including search, transaction, or event-based datasets. One of the key features of the root dataset is that it automatically inherits the knowledge objects associated with its base search. These knowledge objects include field extractions, lookups, aliases, and calculated fields that are defined for the base search, ensuring that the root dataset has all necessary contextual information from the outset. This allows users to build upon this dataset with additional child datasets and objects without having to redefine the base search's knowledge objects.


Question 760

Which of these stats commands will show the total bytes for each unique combination of page and server?



Answer : B

The correct command to show the total bytes for each unique combination of page and server isindex=web | stats sum (bytes) BY page server. In Splunk, thestatscommand is used to calculate aggregate statistics over the dataset, such as count, sum, avg, etc. When using theBYclause, it groups the results by the specified fields. The correct syntax does not include commas or the word 'AND' between the field names. Instead, it simply lists the field names separated by spaces within theBYclause.

Reference: The usage of thestatscommand with theBYclause is confirmed by examples in the Splunk Community, where it's explained thatstatswith aby foo barwill output one row for every unique combination of thebyfields1.


Question 761
Question 762
Question 763

A user wants a table that will show the total revenue made for each product in each sales region. Which would be the correct SPL query to use?



Answer : B

The chart command with sum(price) by product, region will return a table where the total revenue (price) is aggregated (sum) for each product and sales region. This is the correct way to aggregate data in Splunk.


Splunk Docs - chart command

Question 764
Question 765

This function of the stats command allows you to return the middle-most value of field X.



Answer : A


Question 766
Question 767

Where are the descriptions of the data models that come with the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) Add-on documented?



Answer : B

The descriptions of the data models that come with the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) Add-on are documented in the CIM Add-on manual (Option B). This manual provides detailed information about the data models, including their structure, the types of data they are designed to normalize, and how they can be used to facilitate cross-sourcing reporting and analysis.


Question 768
Question 769
Question 770

When using the timechart command, how can a user group the events into buckets based on time?



Answer : A


Question 771

Field aliases are used to __________ data



Answer : D


Question 772

When performing a regex field extraction with the Field Extractor (FX), a data type must be chosen before a sample event can be selected. Which of the following data types are supported?



Answer : D

When using the Field Extractor (FX) in Splunk for regex field extraction, it's important to select the context in which you want to perform the extraction. The context is essentially the subset of data you're focusing on for your field extraction task.

D . Sourcetype or source: This is the correct option. In the initial steps of using the Field Extractor tool, you're prompted to choose a data type for your field extraction. The options available are typically based on the nature of your data and how it's organized in Splunk. 'Sourcetype' refers to the kind of data you're dealing with, a categorization that helps Splunk apply specific processing rules. 'Source' refers to the origin of the data, like a specific log file or data input. By selecting either a sourcetype or source, you're narrowing down the dataset on which you'll perform the regex extraction, making it more manageable and relevant.


Question 773

How do event types help a user search their data?



Answer : D

Event types allow users to assign labels to events based on predefined search strings. This helps categorize data and makes it easier to reference specific sets of events in future searches.


Splunk Docs - Event types

Question 774

Which method in the Field Extractor would extract the port number from the following event? |

10/20/2022 - 125.24.20.1 ++++ port 54 - user: admin



Answer : B

The rex command allows you to extract fields from events using regular expressions. You can use the rex command to specify a named group that matches the port number in the event. For example:

rex '\+\+\+\+port (?\d+)'

This will create a field called port with the value 54 for the event.

The delimiter method is not suitable for this event because there is no consistent delimiter between the fields. The regular expression method is not a valid option for the Field Extractor tool. The Field Extractor tool can extract regular expressions, but it is not a method by itself.


Question 775

Which of these is NOT a field that is automatically created with the transaction command?



Answer : A


Question 776
Question 777

A field alias is created where field1---fieid2 and the Overwrite Field Values checkbox is selected.

What happens if an event only contains values for fieid1?



Answer : D

The correct answer is D. field2 values are replaced with the value of the field1.

A field alias is a way to associate an additional (new) name with an existing field name. A field alias can be used to normalize fields from different sources that have different names but represent the same data. Field aliases can also be used to rename fields for clarity or convenience1.

When you create a field alias in Splunk Web, you can select the Overwrite Field Values option to change the behavior of the field alias. This option affects how the Splunk software handles situations where the original field has no value or does not exist, as well as situations where the alias field already exists as a field in your events, alongside the original field2.

If you select the Overwrite Field Values option, the following rules apply:

If the original field does not exist or has no value in an event, the alias field is removed from that event.

If the original field and the alias field both exist in an event, the value of the alias field is replaced with the value of the original field.

If you do not select the Overwrite Field Values option, the following rules apply:

If the original field does not exist or has no value in an event, the alias field is unchanged in that event.

If the original field and the alias field both exist in an event, both fields are retained with their respective values.

Therefore, if you create a field alias where field1---field2 and select the Overwrite Field Values option, and an event only contains values for field1, then the value of field2 will be replaced with the value of field1.


About calculated fields

About field aliases

Create field aliases in Splunk Web

Question 778

What fields does the transaction command add to the raw events? (select all that apply)



Question 779

Which of the following statements is true, especially in large environments?



Answer : B


The stats command is faster and more efficient than the transaction command, especially in large environments. The stats command is used to calculate summary statistics on the events, such as count, sum, average, etc. The stats command can group events by one or more fields or by time buckets. The stats command does not create new events from groups of events, but rather creates new fields with statistical values. The transaction command is used to group events into transactions based on some common characteristics, such as fields, time, or both. The transaction command creates new events from groups of events that share one or more fields. The transaction command also creates some additional fields for each transaction, such as duration, eventcount, startime, etc. The transaction command is slower and more resource-intensive than the stats command because it has to process more data and create more events and fields.

Question 780

When performing a regular expression (regex) field extraction using the Field Extractor (FX), what happens when the require option is used?



Question 781

Which of the following transforming commands can be used with transactions?

chart, timechart, stats, eventstats

chart, timechart, stats, diff

chart, timeehart, datamodel, pivot

chart, timecha:t, stats, pivot



Answer : A

The correct answer is


About transforming commands

About transactions

chart command overview

timechart command overview

stats command overview

[eventstats command overview]

[diff command overview]

[datamodel command overview]

[pivot command overview]

Question 782
Question 783

What is a limitation of searches generated by workflow actions?



Answer : D


Question 784
Question 785

The gauge command:



Answer : B


Question 786

How do event types help a user search their data?



Answer : D

Event types allow users to assign labels to events based on predefined search strings. This helps categorize data and makes it easier to reference specific sets of events in future searches.


Splunk Docs - Event types

Question 787

Which of the following searches will show the number of categoryld used by each host?



Answer : B


Question 788
Question 789

When using the timechart command, how can a user group the events into buckets based on time?



Answer : A


Question 790

Which search retrieves events with the event type web_errors?



Answer : B

The correct answer is B. eventtype=web_errors.

An event type is a way to categorize events based on a search. An event type assigns a label to events that match a specific search criteria. Event types can be used to filter and group events, create alerts, or generate reports1.

To search for events that have a specific event type, you need to use the eventtype field with the name of the event type as the value. The syntax for this is:

eventtype=<event_type_name>

For example, if you want to search for events that have the event type web_errors, you can use the following syntax:

eventtype=web_errors

This will return only the events that match the search criteria defined by the web_errors event type.

The other options are not correct because they use different syntax or fields that are not related to event types. These options are:

A) tag=web_errors: This option uses the tag field, which is a way to add descriptive keywords to events based on field values. Tags are different from event types, although they can be used together. Tags can be used to filter and group events by common characteristics2.

C) eventtype ''web errors'': This option uses quotation marks around the event type name, which is not valid syntax for the eventtype field. Quotation marks are used to enclose phrases or exact matches in a search3.

D) eventtype (web_errors): This option uses parentheses around the event type name, which is also not valid syntax for the eventtype field. Parentheses are used to group expressions or terms in a search3.


About event types

About tags

Search command cheatsheet

Question 791

When using a field value variable with a Workflow Action, which punctuation mark will escape the data



Answer : B

When using a field value variable with a Workflow Action, the exclamation mark (!) will escape the data. A Workflow Action is a custom action that performs a task when you click on a field value in your search results. A Workflow Action can be configured with various options, such as label name, base URL, URI parameters, post arguments, app context, etc. A field value variable is a placeholder for the field value that will be used to replace the variable in the URL or post argument of the Workflow Action. A field value variable is written as fieldname, where field_name is the name of the field whose value will be used. However, if the field value contains special characters that need to be escaped, such as spaces, commas, etc., you can use the exclamation mark (!) before and after the field value variable to escape the data. For example, if you have a field value variable host, you can write it as !$host! to escape any special characters in the host field value.

Therefore, option B is the correct answer.


Question 792

We can use the rename command to _____ (Select all that apply.)



Answer : D


Question 793
Question 794

Which search would limit an "alert" tag to the "host" field?



Answer : D

The search below would limit an ''alert'' tag to the ''host'' field.

tag::host=alert

The search does the following:

It uses tag syntax to filter events by tags. Tags are custom labels that can be applied to fields or field values to provide additional context or meaning for your data.

It specifies tag::host=alert as the tag filter. This means that it will only return events that have an ''alert'' tag applied to their host field or host field value.

It uses an equal sign (=) to indicate an exact match between the tag and the field or field value.


Question 795
Question 796
Question 797
Question 798

This function of the stats command allows you to identify the number of values a field has.



Answer : D


Question 799
Question 800

Which type of workflow action sends field values to an external resource (e.g. a ticketing system)?



Answer : A

The type of workflow action that sends field values to an external resource (e.g. a ticketing system) is POST. A POST workflow action allows you to send a POST request to a URI location with field values or static values as arguments. For example, you can use a POST workflow action to create a ticket in an external system with information from an event.


Question 801

What does the transaction command do?



Answer : B

The transaction command is a search command that creates a single event from a group of events that share some common characteristics. The transaction command can group events based on fields, time, or both. The transaction command can also create some additional fields for each transaction, such asduration,eventcount,startime, etc. The transaction command does not group a set of transactions based on time, but rather groups a set of events into a transaction based on time. The transaction command does not separate two events based on one or more values, but rather joins multiple events based on one or more values. The transaction command does not return the number of credit card transactions found in the event logs, but rather creates transactions from the events that match the search criteria.


Question 802

Which of these is NOT a field that is automatically created with the transaction command?



Answer : A


Question 803

Consider the following search:

index=web sourcetype=access_combined

The log shows several events that share the same JSESSIONID value (SD470K92802F117). View the events as a group.

From the following list, which search groups events by JSESSIONID?



Answer : B

To group events by JSESSIONID, the correct search is index=web sourcetype=access_combined | transaction JSESSIONID | search SD470K92802F117 (Option B). The transaction command groups events that share the same JSESSIONID value, allowing for the analysis of all events associated with a specific session as a single transaction. The subsequent search for SD470K92802F117 filters these grouped transactions to include only those related to the specified session ID.


Question 804

Which knowledge Object does the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) use to normalize dat

a. in addition to field aliases, event types, and tags?



Answer : B

Normalize your data for each of these fields using a combination of field aliases, field extractions, and lookups.

https://docs.splunk.com/Documentation/CIM/4.15.0/User/UsetheCIMtonormalizedataatsearchtime


Question 805

Which of the following is true about a datamodel that has been accelerated?



Answer : A

A data model that has been accelerated can be used with Pivot, the | tstats command, or the | datamodel command (Option A). Acceleration pre-computes and stores results for quicker access, enhancing the performance of searches and analyses that utilize the data model, especially for large datasets. This makes accelerated data models highly efficient for use in various analytical tools and commands within Splunk.


Question 806

A data model consists of which three types of datasets?



Answer : B

The building block of adata model. Each data model is composed of one or more data model datasets. Each dataset within a data model defines a subset of the dataset represented by the data model as a whole.

Data model datasets have a hierarchical relationship with each other, meaning they have parent-child relationships. Data models can contain multiple dataset hierarchies. There are three types of dataset hierarchies: event, search, and transaction.

https://docs.splunk.com/Splexicon:Datamodeldataset


Question 807
Question 808
Question 809

When using | timchart by host, which filed is representted in the x-axis?



Answer : A


Question 810

Data model are composed of one or more of which of the following datasets? (select all that apply.)



Answer : A, B, C


Data models are collections of datasets that represent your data in a structured and hierarchical way. Data models define how your data is organized into objects and fields. Data models can be composed of one or more of the following datasets:

Events datasets: These are the base datasets that represent raw events in Splunk. Events datasets can be filtered by constraints, such as search terms, sourcetypes, indexes, etc.

Search datasets: These are derived datasets that represent the results of a search on events or other datasets. Search datasets can use any search command, such as stats, eval, rex, etc., to transform the data.

Transaction datasets: These are derived datasets that represent groups of events that are related by fields, time, or both. Transaction datasets can use the transaction command or event types with transactiontype=true to create transactions.

Question 811

A user wants to create a workflow action that will retrieve a specific field value from an event and run a search in a new browser window

in the user's Splunk instance. What kind of workflow action should they create?



Answer : B

A Search workflow action is the appropriate choice when a user wants to retrieve a specific field value from an event and run a search in a new browser window within their Splunk instance (Option B). This type of workflow action allows users to define a search that utilizes field values from selected events as parameters, enabling more detailed investigation or context-specific analysis based on the original search results.


Question 812

Which delimiters can the Field Extractor (FX) detect? (select all that apply)



Answer : B, C, D


The Field Extractor (FX) is a tool that helps you extract fields from your data using delimiters or regular expressions. Delimiters are characters or strings that separate fields in your data. The FX can detect some common delimiters automatically, such as pipes (|), spaces ( ), commas (,), semicolons (;), etc. The FX cannot detect tabs (\t) as delimiters automatically, but you can specify them manually in the FX interface.

Question 813
Question 814

This is what Splunk uses to categorize the data that is being indexed.



Answer : A


Question 815
Question 816

Brad created a tag called "SpecialProjectX". It is associated with several field/value pairs, such as team=support, location=Austin, and release=Fuji. What search should Brad run to filter results for SpecialProjectX events related to the Support Team?



Answer : B

Tags in Splunk allow users to assign multiple field-value pairs to a common label.

The correct syntax to filter by tag is tag::<field>=<tag_name>.

tag::team=SpecialProjectX will filter results where team=support is associated with the tag SpecialProjectX.

tag=SpecialProjectX searches for all events associated with SpecialProjectX, not just the support team.

tag::Support-SpecialProjectX is incorrect syntax.

tag!=Fuji,Austin is incorrect since it does not filter using the SpecialProjectX tag.

Reference: Splunk Docs - Tags


Question 817

Which are valid ways to create an event type? (select all that apply)



Answer : C, D

Event types are custom categories of events that are based on search criteria. Event types can be used to label events with meaningful names, such as error, success, login, logout, etc. Event types can also be used to create transactions, alerts, reports, dashboards, etc. Event types can be created in two ways:

By going to the Settings menu and clicking Event Types > New. This will open a form where you can enter the name, description, search string, app context, and tags for the event type.

By selecting an event in search results and clicking Event Actions > Build Event Type. This will open a dialog box where you can enter the name and description for the event type. The search string will be automatically populated based on the selected event.

Event types cannot be created by using the searchtypes command in the search bar, as this command does not exist in Splunk. Event types can also be created by editing the event_type stanza in the transforms.conf file, not the props.conf file.


Question 818
Question 819

Given the following eval statement:

... | eval field1 = if(isnotnull(field1),field1,0), field2 = if(isnull(field2), "NO-VALUE", field2)

Which of the following is the equivalent using fillnull?



Answer : D

The fillnull command can be used to replace null values in specific fields. The correct equivalent expression for the given eval statement would involve using fillnull twice, once for field1 to replace null values with 0, and once for field2 to replace null values with 'NO-VALUE'.


Splunk Docs - fillnull command

Question 820

Which of the following statements best describes a macro?



Answer : C

The correct answer is C. A macro is a portion of a search that can be reused in multiple places.

A macro is a way to reuse a piece of SPL code in different searches. A macro can be any part of a search, such as an eval statement or a search term, and does not need to be a complete command. A macro can also take arguments, which are variables that can be replaced by different values when the macro is called. A macro can also contain another macro within it, which is called a nested macro1.

To create a macro, you need to define its name, definition, arguments, and description in the Settings > Advanced Search > Search Macros page in Splunk Web or in the macros.conf file. To use a macro in a search, you need to enclose the macro name in backtick characters (`) and provide values for the arguments if any1.

For example, if you have a macro named my_macro that takes one argument named object and has the following definition:

search sourcetype= object

You can use it in a search by writing:

my_macro(web)

This will expand the macro and run the following SPL code:

search sourcetype=web

The benefits of using macros are that they can simplify complex searches, reduce errors, improve readability, and promote consistency1.

The other options are not correct because they describe other types of knowledge objects in Splunk, not macros. These objects are:

A) An event type is a method of categorizing events based on a search. An event type assigns a label to events that match a specific search criteria. Event types can be used to filter and group events, create alerts, or generate reports2.

B) A field alias is a way to associate an additional (new) name with an existing field name. A field alias can be used to normalize fields from different sources that have different names but represent the same data. Field aliases can also be used to rename fields for clarity or convenience3.

D) An alert is a knowledge object that enables you to schedule searches for specific events and trigger actions when certain conditions are met. An alert can be used to monitor your data for anomalies, errors, or other patterns of interest and notify you or others when they occur4.


About event types

About field aliases

About alerts

Define search macros in Settings

Use search macros in searches

Question 821

If there are fields in the data with values that are " " or empty but not null, which of the following would add a value?



Answer : D

The correct answer is D. | eval notNULL = '''' fillnull value=0 notNULL

Option A is incorrect because it is missing a comma between the ''0'' and the notNULL in the if function. The correct syntax for the if function is if (condition, true_value, false_value).

Option B is incorrect because it is missing the false_value argument in the if function. The correct syntax for the if function is if (condition, true_value, false_value).

Option C is incorrect because it uses the nullfill command, which only replaces null values, not empty strings. The nullfill command is equivalent to fillnull value=null.

Option D is correct because it uses the eval command to assign an empty string to the notNULL field, and then uses the fillnull command to replace the empty string with a zero. The fillnull command can replace any value with a specified replacement, not just null values.


Question 822
Question 823
Question 824
Question 825

What is a benefit of installing the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) add-on?



Answer : B

It provides users with a standardized set of field names and tags to normalize data.

The Splunk CIM add-on provides a standardized set of field names and data models, which allows users to normalize and categorize data from various sources into a common format. This helps with data interoperability and enables faster, more consistent reporting and searching across different data sources.


Splunk Documentation - Common Information Model (CIM)

Question 826

When using a field value variable with a Workflow Action, which punctuation mark will escape the data



Answer : B

When using a field value variable with a Workflow Action, the exclamation mark (!) will escape the data. A Workflow Action is a custom action that performs a task when you click on a field value in your search results. A Workflow Action can be configured with various options, such as label name, base URL, URI parameters, post arguments, app context, etc. A field value variable is a placeholder for the field value that will be used to replace the variable in the URL or post argument of the Workflow Action. A field value variable is written as fieldname, where field_name is the name of the field whose value will be used. However, if the field value contains special characters that need to be escaped, such as spaces, commas, etc., you can use the exclamation mark (!) before and after the field value variable to escape the data. For example, if you have a field value variable host, you can write it as !$host! to escape any special characters in the host field value.

Therefore, option B is the correct answer.


Question 827
Question 828
Question 829

Which of the following statements describes field aliases?



Answer : B

Field aliases are alternative names for fields in Splunk. Field aliases can be used to normalize data across different sources and sourcetypes that have different field names for the same concept. For example, you can create a field alias for src_ip that maps to clientip, source_address, or any other field name that represents the source IP address in different sourcetypes. Field aliases can also be used in lookup file definitions to map fields in your data to fields in the lookup file. For example, you can use a field alias for src_ip to map it to ip_address in a lookup file that contains geolocation information for IP addresses. Field alias names do not replace the original field name, but rather create a copy of the field with a different name. Field alias names are case sensitive when used as part of a search, meaning that src_ip and SRC_IP are different fields.


Question 830
Question 831

This is what Splunk uses to categorize the data that is being indexed.



Answer : A


Question 832

Which search would limit an "alert" tag to the "host" field?



Answer : D

The search below would limit an ''alert'' tag to the ''host'' field.

tag::host=alert

The search does the following:

It uses tag syntax to filter events by tags. Tags are custom labels that can be applied to fields or field values to provide additional context or meaning for your data.

It specifies tag::host=alert as the tag filter. This means that it will only return events that have an ''alert'' tag applied to their host field or host field value.

It uses an equal sign (=) to indicate an exact match between the tag and the field or field value.


Question 833

A user wants a table that will show the total revenue made for each product in each sales region. Which would be the correct SPL query to use?



Answer : B

The chart command with sum(price) by product, region will return a table where the total revenue (price) is aggregated (sum) for each product and sales region. This is the correct way to aggregate data in Splunk.


Splunk Docs - chart command

Question 834

When using | timechart by host, which field is represented in the x-axis?



Answer : D


Question 835

This function of the stats command allows you to return the middle-most value of field X.



Answer : A


Question 836

Which of the following knowledge objects can reference field aliases?



Answer : A

Field aliases in Splunk are alternate names assigned to fields. These can be particularly useful for normalizing data from different sources or simply for making field names more intuitive. Once an alias is created for a field, it can be used across various Splunk knowledge objects, enhancing their flexibility and utility.

A . Calculated fields, lookups, event types, and tags: This is the correct answer. Field aliases can indeed be referenced in calculated fields, lookups, event types, and tags within Splunk. When you create an alias for a field, that alias can then be used in these knowledge objects just like any standard field name.

Calculated fields: These are expressions that can create new field values based on existing data. You can use an alias in a calculated field expression to refer to the original field.

Lookups: These are used to enrich your event data by referencing external data sources. If you've created an alias for a field that matches a field in your lookup table, you can use that alias in your lookup configurations.

Event types: These are classifications for events that meet certain search criteria. You can use field aliases in the search criteria for defining an event type.

Tags: These allow you to assign meaningful labels to data, making it easier to search and report on. You can use field aliases in the search criteria that you tag.


Question 837
Question 838
Question 839

A data model consists of which three types of datasets?



Answer : B

The building block of adata model. Each data model is composed of one or more data model datasets. Each dataset within a data model defines a subset of the dataset represented by the data model as a whole.

Data model datasets have a hierarchical relationship with each other, meaning they have parent-child relationships. Data models can contain multiple dataset hierarchies. There are three types of dataset hierarchies: event, search, and transaction.

https://docs.splunk.com/Splexicon:Datamodeldataset


Question 840
Question 841

How is a variable for a macro defined?



Answer : C

In Splunk, a variable for a macro is defined by placing the variable name inside dollar signs, like this: $variable name$. This syntax allows the macro to dynamically replace the variable with the appropriate value when the macro is invoked within a search. Using this method ensures that the search strings can be dynamically adjusted based on the variable's value at runtime.


Splunk Docs: Use macros

Splunk Answers: Defining and Using Macros

Question 842
Question 843
Question 844

Which of the following statements describes macros?



Answer : C


A macro is a reusable search string that can contain any part of a search, such as search terms, commands, arguments, etc. A macro can have a flexible time range that can be specified when the macro is executed. A macro can also have arguments that can be passed to the macro when it is executed. A macro can be created by using the Settings menu or by editing the macros.conf file. A macro does not have to contain the full search, but only the part that needs to be reused. A macro does not have to have a fixed time range, but can use a relative or absolute time range modifier. A macro does not have to contain only a portion of the search, but can contain multiple parts of the search.

Question 845

When using the eval command, which of these characters can be used to concatenate a string and a number into a single value?



Answer : D

In Splunk, the eval command is often used for manipulating field values, including concatenation. The correct way to concatenate a string and a number is to use the . (period) operator. This operator joins different types of data into a single string value.

For example:

eval concatenated_value = 'value_' . 123

Result: concatenated_value will be value_123.

Other operators:

& is not a valid operator in eval for concatenation.

+ is used for arithmetic addition, not concatenation.

- is also not a concatenation operator.


Question 846

What is needed to define a calculated field?



Answer : A

A calculated field in Splunk is created using an eval expression, which allows users to perform calculations or transformations on field values during search time.


Splunk Docs - Calculated fields

Question 847

When using a field value variable with a Workflow Action, which punctuation mark will escape the data



Answer : B

When using a field value variable with a Workflow Action, the exclamation mark (!) will escape the data. A Workflow Action is a custom action that performs a task when you click on a field value in your search results. A Workflow Action can be configured with various options, such as label name, base URL, URI parameters, post arguments, app context, etc. A field value variable is a placeholder for the field value that will be used to replace the variable in the URL or post argument of the Workflow Action. A field value variable is written as fieldname, where field_name is the name of the field whose value will be used. However, if the field value contains special characters that need to be escaped, such as spaces, commas, etc., you can use the exclamation mark (!) before and after the field value variable to escape the data. For example, if you have a field value variable host, you can write it as !$host! to escape any special characters in the host field value.

Therefore, option B is the correct answer.


Question 848

Consider the the following search run over a time range of last 7 days:

index=web sourcetype=access_conbined | timechart avg(bytes) by product_nane

Which option is used to change the default time span so that results are grouped into 12 hour intervals?



Question 849
Question 850
Question 851

The stats command will create a _____________ by default.



Answer : A


Question 852

Given the following eval statement:

... | eval field1 = if(isnotnull(field1),field1,0), field2 = if(isnull(field2), "NO-VALUE", field2)

Which of the following is the equivalent using fillnull?



Answer : D

The fillnull command can be used to replace null values in specific fields. The correct equivalent expression for the given eval statement would involve using fillnull twice, once for field1 to replace null values with 0, and once for field2 to replace null values with 'NO-VALUE'.


Splunk Docs - fillnull command

Question 853
Question 854
Question 855

When using the eval command, which of these characters can be used to concatenate a string and a number into a single value?



Answer : D

In Splunk, the eval command is often used for manipulating field values, including concatenation. The correct way to concatenate a string and a number is to use the . (period) operator. This operator joins different types of data into a single string value.

For example:

eval concatenated_value = 'value_' . 123

Result: concatenated_value will be value_123.

Other operators:

& is not a valid operator in eval for concatenation.

+ is used for arithmetic addition, not concatenation.

- is also not a concatenation operator.


Question 856

Which of the following expressions could be used to create a calculated field called gigabytes?



Answer : B


Question 857
Question 858
Question 859

Clicking a SEGMENT on a chart, ________.



Answer : C


Question 860

Which of the following data models are included in the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) add-on? (select all that apply)



Answer : B, D

The Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) Add-on includes a variety of data models designed to normalize data from different sources to allow for cross-source reporting and analysis. Among the data models included, Alerts (Option B) and Email (Option D) are part of the CIM. The Alerts data model is used for data related to alerts and incidents, while the Email data model is used for data pertaining to email messages and transactions. User permissions (Option A) and Databases (Option C) are not data models included in the CIM; rather, they pertain to aspects of data access control and specific types of data sources, respectively, which are outside the scope of the CIM's predefined data models.


Question 861

How are arguments defined within the macro search string?



Answer : A

Arguments are defined within the macro search string by using dollar signs on either side of the argument name, such as arg1 or fragment.

Reference

Search macro examples

Define search macros in Settings

Use search macros in searches


Question 862

A POST workflow action will pass which types of arguments to an external website?



Answer : B

A POST workflow action in Splunk is designed to send data to an external web service by using HTTP POST requests. This type of workflow action can pass a combination of clear text strings and variables derived from the search results or event data. The clear text strings might include static text or predefined values, while the variables are dynamic elements that represent specific fields or values extracted from the Splunk events. This flexibility allows for constructing detailed and context-specific requests to external systems, enabling various integration and automation scenarios. The POST request can include both types of data, making it versatile for different use cases.


Question 863

Where are the descriptions of the data models that come with the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) Add-on documented?



Answer : D

The CIM Add-on manual contains the descriptions of the data models that come with the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) Add-on, as well as how to set up, use, and customize the add-on.

Reference

CIM Add-on manual

Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) | Splunkbase

Understand and use the Common Information Model Add-on - Splunk


Question 864

Which of the following can be used with the eval command tostring function (select all that apply)



Answer : A, B, D

https://docs.splunk.com/Documentation/Splunk/8.1.0/SearchReference/ConversionFunctions#tostring.28X.2CY.29

The tostring function in the eval command converts a numeric value to a string value. It can take an optional second argument that specifies the format of the string value. Some of the possible formats are:

hex: converts the numeric value to a hexadecimal string.

commas: adds commas to separate thousands in the numeric value.

duration: converts the numeric value to a human-readable duration string, such as ''2h 3m 4s''.

Therefore, the formats A, B, and D can be used with the tostring function.


Question 865
Question 866

Which of the following is true about the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM)?



Answer : D

The Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) is an app that contains a set of predefined data models that apply a common structure and naming convention to data from any source. The CIM enables you to use data from different sources in a consistent and coherent way. The CIM contains 28 pre-configured datasets that cover various domains such as authentication, network traffic, web, email, etc. The data models included in the CIM are configured with data model acceleration turned on by default, which means that they are optimized for faster searches and analysis. Data model acceleration creates and maintains summary data for the data models, which reduces the amount of raw data that needs to be scanned when you run a search using a data model.

: Splunk Core Certified Power User Track, page 10. : Splunk Documentation, About the Splunk Common Information Model.


Question 867

Based on the macro definition shown below, what is the correct way to execute the macro in a search string?



Answer : B


The correct way to execute the macro in a search string is to use the formatmacro_name($arg1$, $arg2$, ...)where$arg1$,$arg2$, etc. are the arguments for the macro. In this case, the macro name isconvert_salesand it takes three arguments:currency,symbol, andrate. The arguments are enclosed in dollar signs and separated by commas. Therefore, the correct way to execute the macro isconvert_sales($euro$, $$, .79).

Question 868

which of the following are valid options with the chart command



Answer : A, B


Question 869

In the following eval statement, what is the value of description if the status is 503? index=main | eval description=case(status==200, "OK", status==404, "Not found", status==500, "Internal Server Error")



Question 870

Which of the following commands will show the maximum bytes?



Answer : C


Question 871
Question 872
Question 873
Question 874
Question 875
Question 876

A calculated field is a shortcut for performing repetitive, long, or complex transformations using which of the following commands?



Answer : D

The correct answer is D. eval.

A calculated field is a field that is added to events at search time by using an eval expression. A calculated field can use the values of two or more fields that are already present in the events to perform calculations. A calculated field can be defined with Splunk Web or in the props.conf file. They can be used in searches, reports, dashboards, and data models like any other extracted field1.

A calculated field is a shortcut for performing repetitive, long, or complex transformations using the eval command. The eval command is used to create or modify fields by using expressions. The eval command can perform mathematical, string, date and time, comparison, logical, and other operations on fields or values2.

For example, if you want to create a new field named total that is the sum of two fields named price and tax, you can use the eval command as follows:

| eval total=price+tax

However, if you want to use this new field in multiple searches, reports, or dashboards, you can create a calculated field instead of writing the eval command every time. To create a calculated field with Splunk Web, you need to go to Settings > Fields > Calculated Fields and enter the name of the new field (total), the name of the sourcetype (sales), and the eval expression (price+tax). This will create a calculated field named total that will be added to all events with the sourcetype sales at search time. You can then use the total field like any other extracted field without writing the eval expression1.

The other options are not correct because they are not related to calculated fields. These options are:

A) transaction: This command is used to group events that share some common values into a single record, called a transaction. A transaction can span multiple events and multiple sources, and can be useful for correlating events that are related but not contiguous3.

B) lookup: This command is used to enrich events with additional fields from an external source, such as a CSV file or a database. A lookup can add fields to events based on the values of existing fields, such as host, source, sourcetype, or any other extracted field.

C) stats: This command is used to calculate summary statistics on the fields in the search results, such as count, sum, average, etc. It can be used to group and aggregate data by one or more fields.


About calculated fields

eval command overview

transaction command overview

[lookup command overview]

[stats command overview]

Question 877

When extracting fields, we may choose to use our own regular expressions



Answer : A


Question 878
Question 879

Which of the following transforming commands can be used with transactions?

chart, timechart, stats, eventstats

chart, timechart, stats, diff

chart, timeehart, datamodel, pivot

chart, timecha:t, stats, pivot



Answer : A

The correct answer is


About transforming commands

About transactions

chart command overview

timechart command overview

stats command overview

[eventstats command overview]

[diff command overview]

[datamodel command overview]

[pivot command overview]

Question 880

Which of the following searches will show the number of categoryld used by each host?



Answer : B


Question 881

Which of the following statements describes POST workflow actions?



Answer : D


Question 882

What is the relationship between data models and pivots?



Answer : A

The relationship between data models and pivots is that data models provide the datasets for pivots. Data models are collections of datasets that represent your data in a structured and hierarchical way. Data models define how your data is organized into objects and fields. Pivots are user interfaces that allow you to create data visualizations that present different aspects of a data model. Pivots let you select options from menus and forms to create charts, tables, maps, etc., without writing any SPL code. Pivots use datasets from data models as their source of data. Pivots and data models are not the same thing, as pivots are tools for visualizing data models. Pivots do not provide datasets for data models, but rather use them as inputs.

Therefore, only statement A is true about the relationship between data models and pivots.


Question 883

Which of the following searches would create a graph similar to the one below?



Answer : C

The following search would create a graph similar to the one below:

index_internal sourcetype=Savesplunker | fields sourcetype, status | transaction status maxspan=1d | timechart count by status

The search does the following:

It uses index_internal to specify the internal index that contains Splunk logs and metrics.

It uses sourcetype=Savesplunker to filter events by the sourcetype that indicates the Splunk Enterprise Security app.

It uses fields sourcetype, status to keep only the sourcetype and status fields in the events.

It uses transaction status maxspan=1d to group events into transactions based on the status field with a maximum time span of one day between the first and last events in a transaction.

It uses timechart count by status to create a time-based chart that shows the count of transactions for each status value over time.

The graph shows the following:

It is a line graph with two lines, one yellow and one blue.

The x-axis is labeled with dates from Wed, Apr 4, 2018 to Tue, Apr 10, 2018.

The y-axis is labeled with numbers from 0 to 15.

The yellow line represents ''shipped'' and the blue line represents ''success''.

The yellow line has a steady increase from 0 to 15, while the blue line has a sharp increase from 0 to 5, then a decrease to 0, and then a sharp increase to 10.

The graph is titled ''Type''.

Therefore, option C is the correct answer.


Question 884
Question 885

Which of the following searches show a valid use of macro? (Select all that apply)



Question 886

The transaction command allows you to __________ events across multiple sources



Answer : B

The transaction command allows you to correlate events across multiple sources. The transaction command is a search command that allows you to group events into transactions based on some common characteristics, such as fields, time, or both. A transaction is a group of events that share one or more fields that relate them to each other. A transaction can span across multiple sources or sourcetypes that have different formats or structures of data. The transaction command can help you correlate events across multiple sources by using the common fields as the basis for grouping. The transaction command can also create some additional fields for each transaction, such as duration, eventcount, startime, etc.


Question 887

What do events in a transaction have In common?



Answer : D


A transaction is a group of events that share some common characteristics, such as fields, time, or both. A transaction can be created by using the transaction command or by defining an event type with transactiontype=true in props.conf. Events in a transaction have one or more fields in common that relate them to each other. For example, you can create a transaction based on JSESSIONID, which is a unique identifier for each user session in web logs. Events in a transaction do not have to have the same timestamp, sourcetype, or exact same set of fields. They only have to share one or more fields that define the transaction.

Question 888

What does the fillnull command replace null values with, it the value argument is not specified?



Answer : A


The fillnull command is a search command that replaces null values with a specified value or 0 if no value is specified. Null values are values that are missing, empty, or undefined in Splunk. The fillnull command can replace null values for all fields or for specific fields. The fillnull command can take an optional argument called value that specifies the value to replace null values with. If no value argument is specified, the fillnull command will replace null values with 0 by default.

Question 889

which of the following commands are used when creating visualizations(select all that apply.)



Answer : A, C, D

The following commands are used when creating visualizations: geom, geostats, and iplocation. Visualizations are graphical representations of data that show trends, patterns, or comparisons. Visualizations can have different types, such as charts, tables, maps, etc. Visualizations can be created by using various commands that transform the data into a suitable format for the visualization type. Some of the commands that are used when creating visualizations are:

geom: This command is used to create choropleth maps that show geographic regions with different colors based on some metric. The geom command takes a KMZ file as an argument that defines the geographic regions and their boundaries. The geom command also takes a field name as an argument that specifies the metric to use for coloring the regions.

geostats: This command is used to create cluster maps that show groups of events with different sizes and colors based on some metric. The geostats command takes a latitude and longitude field as arguments that specify the location of the events. The geostats command also takes a statistical function as an argument that specifies the metric to use for sizing and coloring the clusters.

iplocation: This command is used to create location-based visualizations that show events with different attributes based on their IP addresses. The iplocation command takes an IP address field as an argument and adds some additional fields to the events, such as Country, City, Latitude, Longitude, etc. The iplocation command can be used with other commands such as geom or geostats to create maps based on IP addresses.


Question 890

Which of these is NOT a field that is automatically created with the transaction command?



Answer : A


Question 891
Question 892
Question 893
Question 894
Question 895
Question 896

A field alias has been created based on an original field. A search without any transforming commands is then executed in Smart Mode. Which field name appears in the results?



Question 897
Question 898

There are several ways to access the field extractor. Which option automatically identifies data type, source type, and sample event?



Answer : B

There are several ways to access the field extractor. The option that automatically identifies data type, source type, and sample event is Fields sidebar > Extract New Field. The field extractor is a tool that helps you extract fields from your data using delimiters or regular expressions. The field extractor can generate a regex for you based on your selection of sample values or you can enter your own regex in the field extractor. The field extractor can be accessed by using various methods, such as:

Fields sidebar > Extract New Field: This is the easiest way to access the field extractor. The fields sidebar is a panel that shows all available fields for your data and their values. When you click on Extract New Field in the fields sidebar, Splunk will automatically identify the data type, source type, and sample event for your data based on your current search criteria. You can then use the field extractor to select sample values and generate a regex for your new field.

Event Actions > Extract Fields: This is another way to access the field extractor. Event actions are actions that you can perform on individual events in your search results, such as viewing event details, adding to report, adding to dashboard, etc. When you click on Extract Fields in the event actions menu, Splunk will use the current event as the sample event for your data and ask you to select the source type and data type for your data. You can then use the field extractor to select sample values and generate a regex for your new field.

Settings > Field Extractions > New Field Extraction: This is a more advanced way to access the field extractor. Settings is a menu that allows you to configure various aspects of Splunk, such as indexes, inputs, outputs, users, roles, apps, etc. When you click on New Field Extraction in the Settings menu, Splunk will ask you to enter all the details for your new field extraction manually, such as app context, name, source type, data type, sample event, regex, etc. You can then use the field extractor to verify or modify your regex for your new field.


Question 899

What fields does the transaction command add to the raw events? (select all that apply)



Question 900

It is mandatory for the lookup file to have this for an automatic lookup to work.



Answer : D


Question 901

When using the transaction command, what does the argument maxspan do?



Answer : C


Question 902

This clause is used to group the output of a stats command by a specific name.



Answer : B


Question 903

The eval command 'if' function requires the following three arguments (in order):



Answer : A

The eval command 'if' function requires the following three arguments (in order): boolean expression, result if true, result if false. The eval command is a search command that allows you to create new fields or modify existing fields by performing calculations or transformations on them. The eval command can use various functions to perform different operations on fields. The 'if' function is one of the functions that can be used with the eval command to perform conditional evaluations on fields. The 'if' function takes three arguments: a boolean expression that evaluates to true or false, a result that will be returned if the boolean expression is true, and a result that will be returned if the boolean expression is false. The 'if' function returns one of the two results based on the evaluation of the boolean expression.


Question 904

When a search returns __________, you can view the results as a list.



Answer : C


Question 905

What is the relationship between data models and pivots?



Answer : A

The relationship between data models and pivots is that data models provide the datasets for pivots. Data models are collections of datasets that represent your data in a structured and hierarchical way. Data models define how your data is organized into objects and fields. Pivots are user interfaces that allow you to create data visualizations that present different aspects of a data model. Pivots let you select options from menus and forms to create charts, tables, maps, etc., without writing any SPL code. Pivots use datasets from data models as their source of data. Pivots and data models are not the same thing, as pivots are tools for visualizing data models. Pivots do not provide datasets for data models, but rather use them as inputs.

Therefore, only statement A is true about the relationship between data models and pivots.


Question 906

The gauge command:



Answer : B


Question 907

If there are fields in the data with values that are " " or empty but not null, which of the following would add a value?



Answer : D

The correct answer is D. | eval notNULL = '''' fillnull value=0 notNULL

Option A is incorrect because it is missing a comma between the ''0'' and the notNULL in the if function. The correct syntax for the if function is if (condition, true_value, false_value).

Option B is incorrect because it is missing the false_value argument in the if function. The correct syntax for the if function is if (condition, true_value, false_value).

Option C is incorrect because it uses the nullfill command, which only replaces null values, not empty strings. The nullfill command is equivalent to fillnull value=null.

Option D is correct because it uses the eval command to assign an empty string to the notNULL field, and then uses the fillnull command to replace the empty string with a zero. The fillnull command can replace any value with a specified replacement, not just null values.


Question 908

How can an existing accelerated data model be edited?



Answer : C

An existing accelerated data model can be edited, but the data model must be de-accelerated before any structural edits can be made (Option C). This is because the acceleration process involves pre-computing and storing data, and changes to the data model's structure could invalidate or conflict with the pre-computed data. Once the data model is de-accelerated and edits are completed, it can be re-accelerated to optimize performance.


Question 909

Two separate results tables are being combined using the join command. The outer table has the following values:

The inner table has the following values:

The line of SPL used to join the tables is: join employeeNumber type=outer

How many rows are returned in the new table?



Answer : C

In this case, the outer join is applied, which means that all rows from the outer (left) table will be included, even if there are no matching rows in the inner (right) table. The result will include all five rows from the outer table, with the matched data from the inner table where employeeNumber matches. Rows without matching employeeNumber values will have null values for the fields from the inner table.


Splunk Documentation - Join Command

Question 910

Which of the following commands support the same set of functions?



Answer : C


Question 911

Which workflow action method can be used the action type is set to link?



Answer : A

https://docs.splunk.com/Documentation/Splunk/8.0.2/Knowledge/SetupaGETworkflowaction

Define a GET workflow action

Steps

Navigate toSettings > Fields > Workflow Actions.

ClickNewto open up a new workflow action form.

Define aLabelfor the action.

TheLabelfield enables you to define the text that is displayed in either the field or event workflow menu. Labels can be static or include the value of relevant fields.

Determine whether the workflow action applies to specific fields or event types in your data.

UseApply only to the following fieldsto identify one or more fields. When you identify fields, the workflow action only appears for events that have those fields, either in their event menu or field menus. If you leave it blank or enter an asterisk the action appears in menus for all fields.

UseApply only to the following event typesto identify one or more event types. If you identify an event type, the workflow action only appears in the event menus for events that belong to the event type.

ForShow action indetermine whether you want the action to appear in theEvent menu, theFields menus, orBoth.

SetAction typetolink.

InURIprovide a URI for the location of the external resource that you want to send your field values to.

Similar to theLabelsetting, when you declare the value of a field, you use the name of the field enclosed by dollar signs.

Variables passed in GET actions via URIs are automaticallyURL encodedduring transmission. This means you can include values that have spaces between words or punctuation characters.

UnderOpen link in, determine whether the workflow action displays in the current window or if it opens the link in a new window.

Set theLink methodtoget.

ClickSaveto save your workflow action definition.


Question 912
Question 913

The transaction command allows you to __________ events across multiple sources



Answer : B

The transaction command allows you to correlate events across multiple sources. The transaction command is a search command that allows you to group events into transactions based on some common characteristics, such as fields, time, or both. A transaction is a group of events that share one or more fields that relate them to each other. A transaction can span across multiple sources or sourcetypes that have different formats or structures of data. The transaction command can help you correlate events across multiple sources by using the common fields as the basis for grouping. The transaction command can also create some additional fields for each transaction, such as duration, eventcount, startime, etc.


Question 914
Question 915

Which of the following is true about the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM)?



Answer : D

The Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) is an app that contains a set of predefined data models that apply a common structure and naming convention to data from any source. The CIM enables you to use data from different sources in a consistent and coherent way. The CIM contains 28 pre-configured datasets that cover various domains such as authentication, network traffic, web, email, etc. The data models included in the CIM are configured with data model acceleration turned on by default, which means that they are optimized for faster searches and analysis. Data model acceleration creates and maintains summary data for the data models, which reduces the amount of raw data that needs to be scanned when you run a search using a data model.

: Splunk Core Certified Power User Track, page 10. : Splunk Documentation, About the Splunk Common Information Model.


Question 916

When multiple event types with different color values are assigned to the same event, what determines the color displayed for the events?



Answer : C


When multiple event types with different color values are assigned to the same event, the color displayed for the events is determined by the priority of the event types. The priority is a numerical value that indicates how important an event type is. The higher the priority, the more important the event type. The event type with the highest priority will determine the color of the event.

Question 917

Which type of workflow action sends field values to an external resource (e.g. a ticketing system)?



Answer : A

The type of workflow action that sends field values to an external resource (e.g. a ticketing system) is POST. A POST workflow action allows you to send a POST request to a URI location with field values or static values as arguments. For example, you can use a POST workflow action to create a ticket in an external system with information from an event.


Question 918

What is a benefit of installing the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) add-on?



Answer : B

It provides users with a standardized set of field names and tags to normalize data.

The Splunk CIM add-on provides a standardized set of field names and data models, which allows users to normalize and categorize data from various sources into a common format. This helps with data interoperability and enables faster, more consistent reporting and searching across different data sources.


Splunk Documentation - Common Information Model (CIM)

Question 919

Which of the following statements describe GET workflow actions?



Answer : D

GET workflow actions are custom actions that open a URL link when you click on a field value in your search results. GET workflow actions can be configured with various options, such as label name, base URL, URI parameters, app context, etc. One of the options is to choose whether to open the URL link in the current window or in a new window. GET workflow actions do not have to be configured with POST arguments, as they use GET method to send requests to web servers. Configuration of GET workflow actions does not include choosing a sourcetype, as they do not generate any data in Splunk. Label names for GET workflow actions must include a field name surrounded by dollar signs, as this indicates the field value that will be used to replace the variable in the URL link.


Question 920

Based on the macro definition shown below, what is the correct way to execute the macro in a search string?



Answer : B


The correct way to execute the macro in a search string is to use the formatmacro_name($arg1$, $arg2$, ...)where$arg1$,$arg2$, etc. are the arguments for the macro. In this case, the macro name isconvert_salesand it takes three arguments:currency,symbol, andrate. The arguments are enclosed in dollar signs and separated by commas. Therefore, the correct way to execute the macro isconvert_sales($euro$, $$, .79).

Question 921
Question 922
Question 923

This is what Splunk uses to categorize the data that is being indexed.



Answer : B


Question 924

What fields does the transaction command add to the raw events? (select all that apply)



Question 925

Which knowledge Object does the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) use to normalize dat

a. in addition to field aliases, event types, and tags?



Answer : B

Normalize your data for each of these fields using a combination of field aliases, field extractions, and lookups.

https://docs.splunk.com/Documentation/CIM/4.15.0/User/UsetheCIMtonormalizedataatsearchtime


Question 926

After manually editing; a regular expression (regex), which of the following statements is true?



Answer : B

After manually editing a regular expression (regex) that was created using the Field Extractor (FX) UI, it is no longer possible to edit the field extraction in the FX UI. The FX UI is a tool that helps you extract fields from your data using delimiters or regular expressions. The FX UI can generate a regex for you based on your selection of sample values or you can enter your own regex in the FX UI. However, if you edit the regex manually in the props.conf file, the FX UI will not be able to recognize the changes and will not let you edit the field extraction in the FX UI anymore. You will have to use the props.conf file to make any further changes to the field extraction. Changes made manually cannot be reverted in the FX UI, as the FX UI does not keep track of the changes made in the props.conf file. It is possible to manually edit a regex that was created using the FX UI, as long as you do it in the props.conf file.

Therefore, only statement B is true about manually editing a regex.


Question 927

What does the fillnull command replace null values with, it the value argument is not specified?



Answer : A


The fillnull command is a search command that replaces null values with a specified value or 0 if no value is specified. Null values are values that are missing, empty, or undefined in Splunk. The fillnull command can replace null values for all fields or for specific fields. The fillnull command can take an optional argument called value that specifies the value to replace null values with. If no value argument is specified, the fillnull command will replace null values with 0 by default.

Question 928
Question 929
Question 930

What does the transaction command do?



Answer : B

The transaction command is a search command that creates a single event from a group of events that share some common characteristics. The transaction command can group events based on fields, time, or both. The transaction command can also create some additional fields for each transaction, such asduration,eventcount,startime, etc. The transaction command does not group a set of transactions based on time, but rather groups a set of events into a transaction based on time. The transaction command does not separate two events based on one or more values, but rather joins multiple events based on one or more values. The transaction command does not return the number of credit card transactions found in the event logs, but rather creates transactions from the events that match the search criteria.


Question 931

Which of the following Statements about macros is true? (select all that apply)



Question 932

Which workflow action method can be used the action type is set to link?



Answer : A

https://docs.splunk.com/Documentation/Splunk/8.0.2/Knowledge/SetupaGETworkflowaction

Define a GET workflow action

Steps

Navigate toSettings > Fields > Workflow Actions.

ClickNewto open up a new workflow action form.

Define aLabelfor the action.

TheLabelfield enables you to define the text that is displayed in either the field or event workflow menu. Labels can be static or include the value of relevant fields.

Determine whether the workflow action applies to specific fields or event types in your data.

UseApply only to the following fieldsto identify one or more fields. When you identify fields, the workflow action only appears for events that have those fields, either in their event menu or field menus. If you leave it blank or enter an asterisk the action appears in menus for all fields.

UseApply only to the following event typesto identify one or more event types. If you identify an event type, the workflow action only appears in the event menus for events that belong to the event type.

ForShow action indetermine whether you want the action to appear in theEvent menu, theFields menus, orBoth.

SetAction typetolink.

InURIprovide a URI for the location of the external resource that you want to send your field values to.

Similar to theLabelsetting, when you declare the value of a field, you use the name of the field enclosed by dollar signs.

Variables passed in GET actions via URIs are automaticallyURL encodedduring transmission. This means you can include values that have spaces between words or punctuation characters.

UnderOpen link in, determine whether the workflow action displays in the current window or if it opens the link in a new window.

Set theLink methodtoget.

ClickSaveto save your workflow action definition.


Question 933

Which of the following file formats can be extracted using a delimiter field extraction?



Answer : A

A delimiter field extraction is a method of extracting fields from data that uses a character or a string to separate fields in each event. A delimiter field extraction can be performed by using the Field Extractor (FX) tool or by editing the props.conf file. A delimiter field extraction can be applied to any file format that uses a delimiter to separate fields, such as CSV, TSV, PSV, etc. A CSV file is a comma-separated values file that uses commas as delimiters. Therefore, a CSV file can be extracted using a delimiter field extraction.


Question 934

These allow you to categorize events based on search terms.

Select your answer.



Answer : B


Question 935

What happens when a user edits the regular expression (regex) field extraction generated in the Field Extractor (FX)?



Answer : A


Question 936

When a search returns __________, you can view the results as a list.



Answer : C


Question 937

What is a limitation of searches generated by workflow actions?



Answer : D


Question 938

The gauge command:



Answer : B


Question 939

What approach is recommended when using the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) add-on to normalize data?



Question 940

Which of the following statements describes macros?



Answer : C


A macro is a reusable search string that can contain any part of a search, such as search terms, commands, arguments, etc. A macro can have a flexible time range that can be specified when the macro is executed. A macro can also have arguments that can be passed to the macro when it is executed. A macro can be created by using the Settings menu or by editing the macros.conf file. A macro does not have to contain the full search, but only the part that needs to be reused. A macro does not have to have a fixed time range, but can use a relative or absolute time range modifier. A macro does not have to contain only a portion of the search, but can contain multiple parts of the search.

Question 941

The macro weekly sales (2) contains the search string:

index=games | eval ProductSales = $Price$ * $AmountSold$

Which of the following will return results?



Answer : C

To use a search macro in a search string, you need to place a back tick character (`) before and after the macro name1. You also need to use the same number of arguments as defined in the macro2. The macro weekly sales (2) has two arguments: Price and AmountSold. Therefore, you need to provide two values for these arguments when you call the macro.

The option A is incorrect because it uses parentheses instead of back ticks around the macro name. The option B is incorrect because it uses underscores instead of spaces in the macro name. The option D is incorrect because it uses spaces instead of commas to separate the argument values.


Question 942

How do event types help a user search their data?



Answer : D

Event types allow users to assign labels to events based on predefined search strings. This helps categorize data and makes it easier to reference specific sets of events in future searches.


Splunk Docs - Event types

Question 943
Question 944

To create a tag, which of the following conditions must be met by the user?



Question 945

A user runs the following search:

index---X sourcetype=Y I chart count (domain) as count, sum (price) as sum by product, action usenull=f useother---f

Which of the following table headers match the order this command creates?



Question 946

How can an existing accelerated data model be edited?



Answer : C

An existing accelerated data model can be edited, but the data model must be de-accelerated before any structural edits can be made (Option C). This is because the acceleration process involves pre-computing and storing data, and changes to the data model's structure could invalidate or conflict with the pre-computed data. Once the data model is de-accelerated and edits are completed, it can be re-accelerated to optimize performance.


Question 947

What does the fillnull command replace null values with, it the value argument is not specified?



Answer : A


The fillnull command is a search command that replaces null values with a specified value or 0 if no value is specified. Null values are values that are missing, empty, or undefined in Splunk. The fillnull command can replace null values for all fields or for specific fields. The fillnull command can take an optional argument called value that specifies the value to replace null values with. If no value argument is specified, the fillnull command will replace null values with 0 by default.

Question 948

What is required for a macro to accept three arguments?



Question 949

When extracting fields, we may choose to use our own regular expressions



Answer : A


Question 950

A POST workflow action will pass which types of arguments to an external website?



Answer : B

A POST workflow action in Splunk is designed to send data to an external web service by using HTTP POST requests. This type of workflow action can pass a combination of clear text strings and variables derived from the search results or event data. The clear text strings might include static text or predefined values, while the variables are dynamic elements that represent specific fields or values extracted from the Splunk events. This flexibility allows for constructing detailed and context-specific requests to external systems, enabling various integration and automation scenarios. The POST request can include both types of data, making it versatile for different use cases.


Question 951

When performing a regex field extraction with the Field Extractor (FX), a data type must be chosen before a sample event can be selected. Which of the following data types are supported?



Answer : D

When using the Field Extractor (FX) in Splunk for regex field extraction, it's important to select the context in which you want to perform the extraction. The context is essentially the subset of data you're focusing on for your field extraction task.

D . Sourcetype or source: This is the correct option. In the initial steps of using the Field Extractor tool, you're prompted to choose a data type for your field extraction. The options available are typically based on the nature of your data and how it's organized in Splunk. 'Sourcetype' refers to the kind of data you're dealing with, a categorization that helps Splunk apply specific processing rules. 'Source' refers to the origin of the data, like a specific log file or data input. By selecting either a sourcetype or source, you're narrowing down the dataset on which you'll perform the regex extraction, making it more manageable and relevant.


Question 952

Which of the following statements about tags is true?



Answer : C

Tags are aliases or alternative names for field values in Splunk. They can make your data more understandable by using common or descriptive terms instead of cryptic or technical terms. For example, you can tag a field value such as ''200'' with ''OK'' or ''success'' to indicate that it is a HTTP status code for a successful request. Tags are case sensitive, meaning that ''OK'' and ''ok'' are different tags. Tags are created at search time, meaning that they are applied when you run a search on your data. Tags are searched by using the syntaxtag::<tagname>, where<tagname>is the name of the tag you want to search for.


Question 953

When using the timechart command, how can a user group the events into buckets based on time?



Answer : A


Question 954
Question 955

When should you use the transaction command instead of the scats command?



Answer : D

The transaction command is used to group events into transactions based on some common characteristics, such as fields, time, or both. The transaction command can also specify start and end constraints for the transactions, such as a field value that indicates the beginning or the end of a transaction. The stats command is used to calculate summary statistics on the events, such as count, sum, average, etc. The stats command cannot group events based on start and end constraints, but only on fields or time buckets. Therefore, the transaction command should be used instead of the stats command when you need to group events based on start and end constraints.


Question 956
Question 957
Question 958

The transaction command allows you to __________ events across multiple sources



Answer : B

The transaction command allows you to correlate events across multiple sources. The transaction command is a search command that allows you to group events into transactions based on some common characteristics, such as fields, time, or both. A transaction is a group of events that share one or more fields that relate them to each other. A transaction can span across multiple sources or sourcetypes that have different formats or structures of data. The transaction command can help you correlate events across multiple sources by using the common fields as the basis for grouping. The transaction command can also create some additional fields for each transaction, such as duration, eventcount, startime, etc.


Question 959

What does the transaction command do?



Answer : B

The transaction command is a search command that creates a single event from a group of events that share some common characteristics. The transaction command can group events based on fields, time, or both. The transaction command can also create some additional fields for each transaction, such asduration,eventcount,startime, etc. The transaction command does not group a set of transactions based on time, but rather groups a set of events into a transaction based on time. The transaction command does not separate two events based on one or more values, but rather joins multiple events based on one or more values. The transaction command does not return the number of credit card transactions found in the event logs, but rather creates transactions from the events that match the search criteria.


Question 960

When should transaction be used?



Answer : C


Question 961

Complete the search, .... | _____ failure>successes



Answer : B

The where command can be used to complete the search below.

... | where failure>successes

The where command is a search command that allows you to filter events based on complex or custom criteri

a. The where command can use any boolean expression or function to evaluate each event and determine whether to keep it or discard it. The where command can also compare fields or perform calculations on fields using operators such as >, <, =, +, -, etc. The where command can be used after any transforming command that creates a table or a chart.

The search string below does the following:

It uses ... to represent any search criteria or commands before the where command.

It uses the where command to filter events based on a comparison between two fields: failure and successes.

It uses the greater than operator (>) to compare the values of failure and successes fields for each event.

It only keeps events where failure is greater than successes.


Question 962

Which statement is true?



Answer : C


Pivot is used for creating reports and dashboards. Pivot is a tool that allows you to create reports and dashboards from your data models without writing any SPL commands. Pivot can help you visualize and analyze your data using various options, such as filters, rows, columns, cells, charts, tables, maps, etc. Pivot can also help you accelerate your reports and dashboards by using summary data from your accelerated data models.

Pivot is not used for creating datasets or data models. Datasets are collections of events that represent your data in a structured and hierarchical way. Data models are predefined datasets for various domains, such as network traffic, web activity, authentication, etc. Datasets and data models can be created by using commands such as datamodel or pivot.

Question 963
Question 964
Question 965

Consider the following search:

index=web sourcetype=access_corabined

The log shows several events that share the same jsesszonid value (SD462K101O2F267). View the events as a group.

From the following list, which search groups events by jSSESSIONID?



Question 966

Which of the following statements describe GET workflow actions?



Answer : D

GET workflow actions are custom actions that open a URL link when you click on a field value in your search results. GET workflow actions can be configured with various options, such as label name, base URL, URI parameters, app context, etc. One of the options is to choose whether to open the URL link in the current window or in a new window. GET workflow actions do not have to be configured with POST arguments, as they use GET method to send requests to web servers. Configuration of GET workflow actions does not include choosing a sourcetype, as they do not generate any data in Splunk. Label names for GET workflow actions must include a field name surrounded by dollar signs, as this indicates the field value that will be used to replace the variable in the URL link.


Question 967
Question 968

The stats command will create a _____________ by default.



Answer : A


Question 969

What is needed to define a calculated field?



Answer : A

A calculated field in Splunk is created using an eval expression, which allows users to perform calculations or transformations on field values during search time.


Splunk Docs - Calculated fields

Question 970

When using the timechart command, how can a user group the events into buckets based on time?



Answer : A


Question 971
Question 972

Which of the following statements describes macros?



Answer : C


A macro is a reusable search string that can contain any part of a search, such as search terms, commands, arguments, etc. A macro can have a flexible time range that can be specified when the macro is executed. A macro can also have arguments that can be passed to the macro when it is executed. A macro can be created by using the Settings menu or by editing the macros.conf file. A macro does not have to contain the full search, but only the part that needs to be reused. A macro does not have to have a fixed time range, but can use a relative or absolute time range modifier. A macro does not have to contain only a portion of the search, but can contain multiple parts of the search.

Question 973

Which of the following statements about tags is true? (select all that apply.)



Answer : B, D

The following statements about tags are true: tags are based on field/value pairs and tags categorize events based on a search. Tags are custom labels that can be applied to fields or field values to provide additional context or meaning for your data. Tags can be used to filter or analyze your data based on common concepts or themes. Tags can be created by using various methods, such as search commands, configuration files, user interfaces, etc. Some of the characteristics of tags are:

Tags are based on field/value pairs: This means that tags are associated with a specific field name and a specific field value. For example, you can create a tag called ''alert'' for the field name ''status'' and the field value ''critical''. This means that only events that have status=critical will have the ''alert'' tag applied to them.

Tags categorize events based on a search: This means that tags are defined by a search string that matches the events that you want to tag. For example, you can create a tag called ''web'' for the search string sourcetype=access_combined. This means that only events that match the search string sourcetype=access_combined will have the ''web'' tag applied to them.

The following statements about tags are false: tags are case-insensitive and tags are designed to make data more understandable. Tags are case-sensitive and tags are designed to make data more searchable. Tags are case-sensitive: This means that tags must match the exact case of the field name and field value that they are associated with. For example, if you create a tag called ''alert'' for the field name ''status'' and the field value ''critical'', it will not apply to events that have status=CRITICAL or Status=critical. Tags are designed to make data more searchable: This means that tags can help you find relevant events or patterns in your data by using common concepts or themes. For example, if you create a tag called ''web'' for the search string sourcetype=access_combined, you can use tag=web to find all events related to web activity.


Question 974
Question 975

When does the CIM add-on apply preconfigured data models to the data?



Answer : A

The Common Information Model (CIM) add-on in Splunk applies preconfigured data models to data at search time. This means that when a search is executed, the CIM add-on uses its predefined data models to normalize and map the relevant data to a common format. This approach ensures that data is interpreted and analyzed consistently across various datasets without modifying the data at index time.


Splunk Docs: About the Common Information Model

Splunk Answers: CIM Add-on Data Models

Question 976

A user runs the following search:

index---X sourcetype=Y I chart count (domain) as count, sum (price) as sum by product, action usenull=f useother---f

Which of the following table headers match the order this command creates?



Question 977

What does the transaction command do?



Answer : B

The transaction command is a search command that creates a single event from a group of events that share some common characteristics. The transaction command can group events based on fields, time, or both. The transaction command can also create some additional fields for each transaction, such asduration,eventcount,startime, etc. The transaction command does not group a set of transactions based on time, but rather groups a set of events into a transaction based on time. The transaction command does not separate two events based on one or more values, but rather joins multiple events based on one or more values. The transaction command does not return the number of credit card transactions found in the event logs, but rather creates transactions from the events that match the search criteria.


Question 978

When a search returns __________, you can view the results as a list.



Answer : C


Question 979

Which of the following searches will show the number of categoryld used by each host?



Answer : B


Question 980

Which of the following commands support the same set of functions?



Answer : C


Question 981
Question 982
Question 983

In most large Splunk environments, what is the most efficient command that can be used to group events by fields/



Answer : B

https://docs.splunk.com/Documentation/Splunk/8.0.2/Search/Abouttransactions

In other cases, it's usually better to use thestatscommand, which performs more efficiently, especially in a distributed environment. Often there is a unique ID in the events andstatscan be used.


Question 984

The stats command will create a _____________ by default.



Answer : A


Question 985
Question 986
Question 987

How can an existing accelerated data model be edited?



Answer : C

An existing accelerated data model can be edited, but the data model must be de-accelerated before any structural edits can be made (Option C). This is because the acceleration process involves pre-computing and storing data, and changes to the data model's structure could invalidate or conflict with the pre-computed data. Once the data model is de-accelerated and edits are completed, it can be re-accelerated to optimize performance.


Question 988

Given the following eval statement:

... | eval field1 = if(isnotnull(field1),field1,0), field2 = if(isnull(field2), "NO-VALUE", field2)

Which of the following is the equivalent using fillnull?



Answer : D

The fillnull command can be used to replace null values in specific fields. The correct equivalent expression for the given eval statement would involve using fillnull twice, once for field1 to replace null values with 0, and once for field2 to replace null values with 'NO-VALUE'.


Splunk Docs - fillnull command

Question 989

Which of the following searches would create a graph similar to the one below?



Answer : C

The following search would create a graph similar to the one below:

index_internal sourcetype=Savesplunker | fields sourcetype, status | transaction status maxspan=1d | timechart count by status

The search does the following:

It uses index_internal to specify the internal index that contains Splunk logs and metrics.

It uses sourcetype=Savesplunker to filter events by the sourcetype that indicates the Splunk Enterprise Security app.

It uses fields sourcetype, status to keep only the sourcetype and status fields in the events.

It uses transaction status maxspan=1d to group events into transactions based on the status field with a maximum time span of one day between the first and last events in a transaction.

It uses timechart count by status to create a time-based chart that shows the count of transactions for each status value over time.

The graph shows the following:

It is a line graph with two lines, one yellow and one blue.

The x-axis is labeled with dates from Wed, Apr 4, 2018 to Tue, Apr 10, 2018.

The y-axis is labeled with numbers from 0 to 15.

The yellow line represents ''shipped'' and the blue line represents ''success''.

The yellow line has a steady increase from 0 to 15, while the blue line has a sharp increase from 0 to 5, then a decrease to 0, and then a sharp increase to 10.

The graph is titled ''Type''.

Therefore, option C is the correct answer.


Question 990

What happens to the original field name when a field alias is created?



Answer : A

Creating a field alias in Splunk does not modify or remove the original field. Instead, the alias allows the same data to be accessed using a different field name without affecting the original field.


Question 991
Question 992

Which knowledge Object does the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) use to normalize dat

a. in addition to field aliases, event types, and tags?



Answer : B

Normalize your data for each of these fields using a combination of field aliases, field extractions, and lookups.

https://docs.splunk.com/Documentation/CIM/4.15.0/User/UsetheCIMtonormalizedataatsearchtime


Question 993

Which of the following statements is true about the root dataset of a data model?



Answer : B

In Splunk, a data model's root dataset is the foundational element upon which the rest of the data model is built. The root dataset can be of various types, including search, transaction, or event-based datasets. One of the key features of the root dataset is that it automatically inherits the knowledge objects associated with its base search. These knowledge objects include field extractions, lookups, aliases, and calculated fields that are defined for the base search, ensuring that the root dataset has all necessary contextual information from the outset. This allows users to build upon this dataset with additional child datasets and objects without having to redefine the base search's knowledge objects.


Question 994

Which of the following searches will show the number of categoryld used by each host?



Answer : B


Question 995

When multiple event types with different color values are assigned to the same event, what determines the color displayed for the events?



Answer : C


When multiple event types with different color values are assigned to the same event, the color displayed for the events is determined by the priority of the event types. The priority is a numerical value that indicates how important an event type is. The higher the priority, the more important the event type. The event type with the highest priority will determine the color of the event.

Question 996
Question 997
Question 998
Question 999

What is the correct syntax to find events associated with a tag?



Answer : D

The correct syntax to find events associated with a tag in Splunk is tag=<value>1. So, the correct answer is D) tag=<value>. This syntax allows you to annotate specified fields in your search results with tags1.

In Splunk, tags are a type of knowledge object that you can use to add meaningful aliases to field values in your data1. For example, if you have a field called status_code in your data, you might have different status codes like 200, 404, 500, etc. You can create tags for these status codes like success for 200, not_found for 404, and server_error for 500. Then, you can use the tag command in your searches to find events associated with these tags1.

Here is an example of how you can use the tag command in a search:

index=main sourcetype=access_combined | tag status_code

In this search, the tag command annotates the status_code field in the search results with the corresponding tags. If you have tagged the status code 200 with success, the status code 404 with not_found, and the status code 500 with server_error, the search results will include these tags1.

You can also use the tag command with a specific tag value to find events associated with that tag. For example, the following search finds all events where the status code is tagged with success:

index=main sourcetype=access_combined | tag status_code | search tag::status_code=success

In this search, the tag command annotates the status_code field with the corresponding tags, and the search command filters the results to include only events where the status_code field is tagged with success1.


Question 1000

Which of the following commands will show the maximum bytes?



Answer : C


Question 1001

What does the transaction command do?



Answer : B

The transaction command is a search command that creates a single event from a group of events that share some common characteristics. The transaction command can group events based on fields, time, or both. The transaction command can also create some additional fields for each transaction, such asduration,eventcount,startime, etc. The transaction command does not group a set of transactions based on time, but rather groups a set of events into a transaction based on time. The transaction command does not separate two events based on one or more values, but rather joins multiple events based on one or more values. The transaction command does not return the number of credit card transactions found in the event logs, but rather creates transactions from the events that match the search criteria.


Question 1002

Which workflow uses field values to perform a secondary search?



Question 1003

Which of the following statements about tags is true?



Answer : C

Tags are aliases or alternative names for field values in Splunk. They can make your data more understandable by using common or descriptive terms instead of cryptic or technical terms. For example, you can tag a field value such as ''200'' with ''OK'' or ''success'' to indicate that it is a HTTP status code for a successful request. Tags are case sensitive, meaning that ''OK'' and ''ok'' are different tags. Tags are created at search time, meaning that they are applied when you run a search on your data. Tags are searched by using the syntaxtag::<tagname>, where<tagname>is the name of the tag you want to search for.


Question 1004

Which statement is true?



Answer : C

The statement that pivot is used for creating reports and dashboards is true. Pivot is a graphical interface that allows you to create tables, charts, and visualizations from data models. Data models are structured datasets that define how data is organized and categorized. Pivot does not create datasets, but uses existing ones.


Question 1005

When should you use the transaction command instead of the scats command?



Answer : D

The transaction command is used to group events into transactions based on some common characteristics, such as fields, time, or both. The transaction command can also specify start and end constraints for the transactions, such as a field value that indicates the beginning or the end of a transaction. The stats command is used to calculate summary statistics on the events, such as count, sum, average, etc. The stats command cannot group events based on start and end constraints, but only on fields or time buckets. Therefore, the transaction command should be used instead of the stats command when you need to group events based on start and end constraints.


Question 1006
Question 1007

The eval command 'if' function requires the following three arguments (in order):



Answer : A

The eval command 'if' function requires the following three arguments (in order): boolean expression, result if true, result if false. The eval command is a search command that allows you to create new fields or modify existing fields by performing calculations or transformations on them. The eval command can use various functions to perform different operations on fields. The 'if' function is one of the functions that can be used with the eval command to perform conditional evaluations on fields. The 'if' function takes three arguments: a boolean expression that evaluates to true or false, a result that will be returned if the boolean expression is true, and a result that will be returned if the boolean expression is false. The 'if' function returns one of the two results based on the evaluation of the boolean expression.


Question 1008

Information needed to create a GET workflow action includes which of the following? (select all that apply.)



Answer : A, B, C


Information needed to create a GET workflow action includes the following: a name of the workflow action, a URI where the user will be directed at search time, and a label that will appear in the Event Action menu at search time. A GET workflow action is a type of workflow action that performs a GET request when you click on a field value in your search results. A GET workflow action can be configured with various options, such as:

A name of the workflow action: This is a unique identifier for the workflow action that is used internally by Splunk. The name should be descriptive and meaningful for the purpose of the workflow action.

A URI where the user will be directed at search time: This is the base URL of the external web service or application that will receive the GET request. The URI can include field value variables that will be replaced by the actual field values at search time. For example, if you have a field value variable ip, you can write it as http://example.com/ip=$ip to send the IP address as a parameter to the external web service or application.

A label that will appear in the Event Action menu at search time: This is the display name of the workflow action that will be shown in the Event Action menu when you click on a field value in your search results. The label should be clear and concise for the user to understand what the workflow action does.

Therefore, options A, B, and C are correct.

Question 1009

When performing a regex field extraction with the Field Extractor (FX), a data type must be chosen before a sample event can be selected. Which of the following data types are supported?



Answer : D

When using the Field Extractor (FX) in Splunk for regex field extraction, it's important to select the context in which you want to perform the extraction. The context is essentially the subset of data you're focusing on for your field extraction task.

D . Sourcetype or source: This is the correct option. In the initial steps of using the Field Extractor tool, you're prompted to choose a data type for your field extraction. The options available are typically based on the nature of your data and how it's organized in Splunk. 'Sourcetype' refers to the kind of data you're dealing with, a categorization that helps Splunk apply specific processing rules. 'Source' refers to the origin of the data, like a specific log file or data input. By selecting either a sourcetype or source, you're narrowing down the dataset on which you'll perform the regex extraction, making it more manageable and relevant.


Question 1010

Brad created a tag called "SpecialProjectX". It is associated with several field/value pairs, such as team=support, location=Austin, and release=Fuji. What search should Brad run to filter results for SpecialProjectX events related to the Support Team?



Answer : B

Tags in Splunk allow users to assign multiple field-value pairs to a common label.

The correct syntax to filter by tag is tag::<field>=<tag_name>.

tag::team=SpecialProjectX will filter results where team=support is associated with the tag SpecialProjectX.

tag=SpecialProjectX searches for all events associated with SpecialProjectX, not just the support team.

tag::Support-SpecialProjectX is incorrect syntax.

tag!=Fuji,Austin is incorrect since it does not filter using the SpecialProjectX tag.

Reference: Splunk Docs - Tags


Question 1011

Which of the following expressions could be used to create a calculated field called gigabytes?



Answer : B


Question 1012

When should the regular expression mode of Field Extractor (FX) be used? (select all that apply)



Question 1013
Question 1014

Given the following eval statement:

... | eval field1 = if(isnotnull(field1),field1,0), field2 = if(isnull(field2), "NO-VALUE", field2)

Which of the following is the equivalent using fillnull?



Answer : D

The fillnull command can be used to replace null values in specific fields. The correct equivalent expression for the given eval statement would involve using fillnull twice, once for field1 to replace null values with 0, and once for field2 to replace null values with 'NO-VALUE'.


Splunk Docs - fillnull command

Question 1015

Use the dedup command to _____.



Answer : B


Question 1016

Which of the following statements describe the search string below?

| datamodel Application_State All_Application_State search



Answer : B

The search string below returns events from the data model named Application_State.

| datamodel Application_State All_Application_State search

The search string does the following:

It uses the datamodel command to access a data model in Splunk. The datamodel command takes two arguments: the name of the data model and the name of the dataset within the data model.

It specifies the name of the data model as Application_State. This is a predefined data model in Splunk that contains information about web applications.

It specifies the name of the dataset as All_Application_State. This is a root dataset in the data model that contains all events from all child datasets.

It uses the search command to filter and transform the events from the dataset. The search command can use any search criteria or command to modify the results.

Therefore, the search string returns events from the data model named Application_State.


Question 1017

Which type of workflow action sends field values to an external resource (e.g. a ticketing system)?



Answer : A

The type of workflow action that sends field values to an external resource (e.g. a ticketing system) is POST. A POST workflow action allows you to send a POST request to a URI location with field values or static values as arguments. For example, you can use a POST workflow action to create a ticket in an external system with information from an event.


Question 1018

Which of the following is true about a datamodel that has been accelerated?



Answer : A

A data model that has been accelerated can be used with Pivot, the | tstats command, or the | datamodel command (Option A). Acceleration pre-computes and stores results for quicker access, enhancing the performance of searches and analyses that utilize the data model, especially for large datasets. This makes accelerated data models highly efficient for use in various analytical tools and commands within Splunk.


Question 1019

This function of the stats command allows you to return the middle-most value of field X.



Answer : A


Question 1020
Question 1021

What do events in a transaction have In common?



Answer : D


A transaction is a group of events that share some common characteristics, such as fields, time, or both. A transaction can be created by using the transaction command or by defining an event type with transactiontype=true in props.conf. Events in a transaction have one or more fields in common that relate them to each other. For example, you can create a transaction based on JSESSIONID, which is a unique identifier for each user session in web logs. Events in a transaction do not have to have the same timestamp, sourcetype, or exact same set of fields. They only have to share one or more fields that define the transaction.

Question 1022

When performing a regular expression (regex) field extraction using the Field Extractor (FX), what happens when the require option is used?



Question 1023
Question 1024
Question 1025
Question 1026

Which of the following statements about tags is true?



Answer : B

Tags are a knowledge object that allow you to assign an alias to one or more field values . Tags are applied to events at search time and can be used as search terms or filters .

Tags can help you make your data more understandable by replacing cryptic or complex field values with meaningful names . For example, you can tag the value200in thestatusfield assuccess, or tag the value404asnot_found.


Question 1027
Question 1028

The limit attribute will___________.



Answer : A


Question 1029

Which search would limit an "alert" tag to the "host" field?



Answer : D

The search below would limit an ''alert'' tag to the ''host'' field.

tag::host=alert

The search does the following:

It uses tag syntax to filter events by tags. Tags are custom labels that can be applied to fields or field values to provide additional context or meaning for your data.

It specifies tag::host=alert as the tag filter. This means that it will only return events that have an ''alert'' tag applied to their host field or host field value.

It uses an equal sign (=) to indicate an exact match between the tag and the field or field value.


Question 1030
Question 1031

In which Settings section are macros defined?



Answer : C


Question 1032

Which of the following can a field alias be applied to?



Answer : C

Field aliases in Splunk are used to map field names in event data to alternate names to make them easier to understand or consistent across datasets.

Option A (Tags): Field aliases are not directly applied to tags. Tags are used for categorizing events or field values.

Option B (Indexes): Field aliases cannot be applied to indexes. Indexes are physical storage locations for events in Splunk.

Option C (Sourcetypes): This is correct. Field aliases can be defined at the sourcetype level to ensure consistent naming across events of the same sourcetype.

Option D (Event types): Event types are saved searches, and field aliases do not apply here directly.


Splunk Docs: Field Aliases

Question 1033
Question 1034

How is a variable for a macro defined?



Answer : C

In Splunk, a variable for a macro is defined by placing the variable name inside dollar signs, like this: $variable name$. This syntax allows the macro to dynamically replace the variable with the appropriate value when the macro is invoked within a search. Using this method ensures that the search strings can be dynamically adjusted based on the variable's value at runtime.


Splunk Docs: Use macros

Splunk Answers: Defining and Using Macros

Question 1035

What information must be included when using the datamodel command?



Answer : D


Question 1036
Question 1037

A user runs the following search:

index---X sourcetype=Y I chart count (domain) as count, sum (price) as sum by product, action usenull=f useother---f

Which of the following table headers match the order this command creates?



Question 1038

What is needed to define a calculated field?



Answer : A

A calculated field in Splunk is created using an eval expression, which allows users to perform calculations or transformations on field values during search time.


Splunk Docs - Calculated fields

Question 1039

When using a field value variable with a Workflow Action, which punctuation mark will escape the data



Answer : B

When using a field value variable with a Workflow Action, the exclamation mark (!) will escape the data. A Workflow Action is a custom action that performs a task when you click on a field value in your search results. A Workflow Action can be configured with various options, such as label name, base URL, URI parameters, post arguments, app context, etc. A field value variable is a placeholder for the field value that will be used to replace the variable in the URL or post argument of the Workflow Action. A field value variable is written as fieldname, where field_name is the name of the field whose value will be used. However, if the field value contains special characters that need to be escaped, such as spaces, commas, etc., you can use the exclamation mark (!) before and after the field value variable to escape the data. For example, if you have a field value variable host, you can write it as !$host! to escape any special characters in the host field value.

Therefore, option B is the correct answer.


Question 1040

Which of the following statements best describes a macro?



Answer : C

The correct answer is C. A macro is a portion of a search that can be reused in multiple places.

A macro is a way to reuse a piece of SPL code in different searches. A macro can be any part of a search, such as an eval statement or a search term, and does not need to be a complete command. A macro can also take arguments, which are variables that can be replaced by different values when the macro is called. A macro can also contain another macro within it, which is called a nested macro1.

To create a macro, you need to define its name, definition, arguments, and description in the Settings > Advanced Search > Search Macros page in Splunk Web or in the macros.conf file. To use a macro in a search, you need to enclose the macro name in backtick characters (`) and provide values for the arguments if any1.

For example, if you have a macro named my_macro that takes one argument named object and has the following definition:

search sourcetype= object

You can use it in a search by writing:

my_macro(web)

This will expand the macro and run the following SPL code:

search sourcetype=web

The benefits of using macros are that they can simplify complex searches, reduce errors, improve readability, and promote consistency1.

The other options are not correct because they describe other types of knowledge objects in Splunk, not macros. These objects are:

A) An event type is a method of categorizing events based on a search. An event type assigns a label to events that match a specific search criteria. Event types can be used to filter and group events, create alerts, or generate reports2.

B) A field alias is a way to associate an additional (new) name with an existing field name. A field alias can be used to normalize fields from different sources that have different names but represent the same data. Field aliases can also be used to rename fields for clarity or convenience3.

D) An alert is a knowledge object that enables you to schedule searches for specific events and trigger actions when certain conditions are met. An alert can be used to monitor your data for anomalies, errors, or other patterns of interest and notify you or others when they occur4.


About event types

About field aliases

About alerts

Define search macros in Settings

Use search macros in searches

Question 1041

This function of the stats command allows you to identify the number of values a field has.



Answer : D


Question 1042
Question 1043
Question 1044
Question 1045

Which statement is true?



Answer : C


Pivot is used for creating reports and dashboards. Pivot is a tool that allows you to create reports and dashboards from your data models without writing any SPL commands. Pivot can help you visualize and analyze your data using various options, such as filters, rows, columns, cells, charts, tables, maps, etc. Pivot can also help you accelerate your reports and dashboards by using summary data from your accelerated data models.

Pivot is not used for creating datasets or data models. Datasets are collections of events that represent your data in a structured and hierarchical way. Data models are predefined datasets for various domains, such as network traffic, web activity, authentication, etc. Datasets and data models can be created by using commands such as datamodel or pivot.

Question 1046

The gauge command:



Answer : B


Question 1047

By default, how is acceleration configured in the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) add-on?



Answer : D

By default, acceleration is determined automatically based on the data source in the Splunk Common Information Model (CIM) add-on. The Splunk CIM Add-on is an app that provides common data models for various domains, such as network traffic, web activity, authentication, etc. The CIM Add-on allows you to normalize and enrich your data using predefined fields and tags. The CIM Add-on also allows you to accelerate your data models for faster searches and reports. Acceleration is a feature that pre-computes summary data for your data models and stores them in tsidx files. Acceleration can improve the performance and efficiency of your searches and reports that use data models.

By default, acceleration is determined automatically based on the data source in the CIM Add-on. This means that Splunk will decide whether to enable or disable acceleration for each data model based on some factors, such as data volume, data type, data model complexity, etc. However, you can also manually enable or disable acceleration for each data model by using the Settings menu or by editing the datamodels.conf file.


Question 1048

A POST workflow action will pass which types of arguments to an external website?



Answer : B

A POST workflow action in Splunk is designed to send data to an external web service by using HTTP POST requests. This type of workflow action can pass a combination of clear text strings and variables derived from the search results or event data. The clear text strings might include static text or predefined values, while the variables are dynamic elements that represent specific fields or values extracted from the Splunk events. This flexibility allows for constructing detailed and context-specific requests to external systems, enabling various integration and automation scenarios. The POST request can include both types of data, making it versatile for different use cases.


Question 1049
Page:    1 / 14   
Total 297 questions